WO2022077402A1 - Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium - Google Patents

Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022077402A1
WO2022077402A1 PCT/CN2020/121327 CN2020121327W WO2022077402A1 WO 2022077402 A1 WO2022077402 A1 WO 2022077402A1 CN 2020121327 W CN2020121327 W CN 2020121327W WO 2022077402 A1 WO2022077402 A1 WO 2022077402A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
reference signal
information
srs
resource set
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/121327
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
袁世通
刘凤威
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/121327 priority Critical patent/WO2022077402A1/en
Publication of WO2022077402A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022077402A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the technical field of determining transmission parameters, and in particular, to a method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatuses and devices, and computer-readable storage media.
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output, MIMO
  • a MIMO system is an antenna system in which multiple antennas are used at both the transmitting end and the receiving end, and multiple channels are formed between transmitting and receiving.
  • MIMO technology is a complex antenna diversity technology, and the multipath effect will affect the signal quality.
  • the MIMO system uses the multipath effect to improve the communication quality.
  • the transmitter and the receiver use multiple antennas that can work at the same time to communicate.
  • MIMO systems usually use complex signal processing techniques to significantly enhance reliability, transmission range, and throughput.
  • the transmitter uses MIMO technology to transmit multiple RF signals at the same time, and the receiver recovers the data from these signals.
  • MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission there are two main ways to use MIMO technology to transmit data in the uplink: one is the MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission, and a variety of codebooks are defined in the protocol. , which can support terminals with various hardware conditions to perform uplink transmission in various scenarios.
  • Another way is that MIMO is based on non-codebook (Non-codebook) uplink transmission.
  • the terminal no longer performs uplink transmission according to the codebook defined by the protocol, but according to the relevant channel state reference signal CSI-RS (Channel State Reference Signal).
  • CSI-RS Channel State Reference Signal
  • Information-Reference Signal, CIS-RS adjusts the weight of the uplink channel by itself, and transmits the signal in the uplink.
  • the access link and the backhaul link may use overlapping time and frequency resources. If the signal sent by the MT of the IAB relay node enters the receiver of the DU of the IAB relay node through leakage or reflection, it will cause serious interference to the normal uplink signal received by the IAB DU. In addition, the working modes of full duplex and space division multiplexing will limit MIMO transmission. For example, some ports and panels are unavailable, and the uplink MIMO transmission scheme of the existing protocol cannot support the uplink transmission of IAB MT in multiple transmission modes.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes a method for determining transmission parameters, which solves the self-interference caused by the IAB relay node and the hardware problems of the IAB relay node in the scenario of MIMO based on space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. MIMO transmission is limited.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
  • the first node reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device;
  • the first node receives a first resource set sent by the network device; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the working modes in the embodiments of the present application may include a time division multiplexing mode, a space division multiplexing mode, and a full-duplex mode; the full-duplex mode is optional, and may be further divided into uplink full-duplex and downlink full-duplex.
  • the first node refers to a relay node in the mobile communication network, which can be called a node, a relay node, an IAB node, an IAB node, an IAB relay node, etc.; the network equipment refers to a base station and the like that can implement a wired communication network.
  • the first node needs to report multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device before using MIMO to transmit signals to the second node.
  • the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported correspond to different working modes.
  • the MIMO parameters configure the corresponding SRS resources so that the first node can select the corresponding SRS resources when using MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that the IAB node is generated from the Interference, as well as IAB relay node equipment hardware problems lead to technical problems that limit MIMO transmission.
  • the second node is an upper-level node of the first node.
  • the MIMO parameters in the different working modes include:
  • the number of available ports in the different working modes the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • a port refers to an antenna port, or port for short, which is a logical port.
  • the MIMO parameters include the number of available ports, the relationship between the available ports, and the number of available panels. The above three pieces of information can explicitly or implicitly indicate the working mode corresponding to the MIMO parameters.
  • the first node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes.
  • the network device configures multiple sets of SRS resources according to the multiple sets of reported MIMO parameters.
  • the first node uses the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode in which the first node is located, and uses the MIMO uplink transmission signal according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • multiple sets of MIMO parameters are reported to the network device, which is beneficial for the network device to configure the corresponding SRS resources, thereby solving the problem that the first node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. , and the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited due to the hardware problem of the first node device.
  • the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the sets of multiple reference signal resources respectively correspond to MIMO parameters in the different working modes; wherein each The set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
  • the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding; wherein, each type of reference signal resources includes one or more reference signal resources.
  • the first resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the IAB node.
  • the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is that the first resource set is a plurality of reference signals.
  • the set of resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the multiple SRS resource sets are the SRS resources configured by the network equipment, and each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources, so
  • the reference signal resource mentioned above refers to the SRS resource.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set.
  • the second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the MIMO transmission is restricted due to hardware problems of the first node.
  • the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources
  • the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource
  • one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode
  • the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device.
  • the network equipment is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource in the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources).
  • the method further includes:
  • the first node reports first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
  • the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  • the first indication information may be scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, which is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node;
  • a reference signal resource is an SRS resource selected according to scheduling signaling; the first reference signal may be an SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node.
  • the second node sends scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used to instruct the first node to send an SRS signal to the second node.
  • the first node transmits a signal to the second node based on a codebook
  • the first node will send the unavailable TPMI to the second node, and the function of the TPMI is to indicate the precoding matrix.
  • the first node provides a reference when the second node selects the precoding matrix from the codebook by sending the unavailable TPMI to the second node, so that the second node selects the precoding matrix to avoid those when using MIMO transmission for the first node. , a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
  • the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
  • the indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • the first indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the precoding matrices indicated in the codebooks corresponding to different working modes may be different, and the indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate which working mode corresponds to the TPMI sent by the first node. codebook, avoiding the situation where one TPMI indicates precoding matrices in multiple codebooks.
  • the using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set includes:
  • the first reference signal resource in the first resource set is selected according to the first state information.
  • the first indication information includes one or more SRIs, and the one or more SRIs are used to instruct the first node to use the first resource Select the corresponding SRS resource centrally.
  • the first node will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and select the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the first indication information, and then send the SRS resource to the first node according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • Two nodes send SRS signals.
  • the first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node. Therefore, the SRS resource selected by the first node according to the first state information is the current working mode of the first node.
  • the corresponding SRS resource The first node selects the first reference signal resource through the first state information, so that the first node selects the SRS resource in its corresponding working mode, which can effectively avoid strong interference in the process of transmitting signals to the second node, etc. question.
  • the first state information is:
  • Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node are Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
  • the first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node, so that the first node selects the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode, avoiding that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources Case.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first node sends a second reference signal to the second node by using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
  • the first node reports second information to the second node; wherein, the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
  • the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  • the second indication information may be scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node;
  • the second reference The signal resource is an SRS resource selected according to scheduling signaling;
  • the first reference signal may be an SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node;
  • the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the second node sends a scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used for the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node.
  • the first node sends the SRS signal to the second node in a non-codebook based manner
  • the second node also sends a CSI-RS signal to the first node, which is used by the first node to estimate the uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix.
  • the first node after sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the second node, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource.
  • the first node By sending the unavailable SRI to the second node, the first node provides a reference when the second node selects the SRS resource, so that the second node can avoid the possibility of using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource.
  • SRS resource that brings problems such as strong interference.
  • the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
  • the indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • the second indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable SRIs in the different working modes. For the same SRI, if the working mode corresponding to the SRS resource is different, the indicated SRS resource may also be different.
  • the indication information of different working modes in the second indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode the SRI sent by the first node corresponds to, avoiding a situation where one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
  • the using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set includes:
  • the first node after receiving the second indication information from the second node, the first node selects a corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, and sends an SRS signal to the second node according to the configuration information in the SRS resource.
  • the second state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node. Therefore, the SRS resource selected by the first node according to the second state information is the current working mode of the first node.
  • the corresponding SRS resource selects the first reference signal resource through the second state information, so that the first node selects the SRS resource under its corresponding working mode, which can effectively solve problems such as strong interference in the process of transmitting signals to the second node. .
  • the second state information is:
  • Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node are Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
  • the first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node, so that the first node selects the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode, avoiding the situation that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
  • the first node reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, including:
  • the second parameter is a MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode
  • the first node reports a third parameter to the network device based on the first request signaling; wherein, the third parameter is that the first node is in another working mode other than the first working mode MIMO parameters.
  • the first node there is another way for the first node to report the MIMO parameters to the network device, that is, the first node first reports a set of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the set of MIMO parameters corresponds to the MIMO in the time division multiplexing mode parameter. Then, the first node receives request signaling sent by the network device, where the first request signaling is used to instruct the first node to report one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to other working modes. The first node sends the MIMO parameter to the network device according to the first request signaling, and then receives the SRS resource configured by the network device.
  • the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the superior node, it can select the corresponding SRS resource, thus solving the problem of self-interference generated by the IAB node and the hardware of the IAB relay node in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission.
  • the problem causes a technical issue where MIMO transmission is limited.
  • the first node receives the first resource set sent by the network device, including:
  • the set of first reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources with the same function
  • the first node receives the resource set configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
  • the second parameter is the MIMO transmission parameter of the first node in the time division multiplexing mode
  • the set of the first reference signal resources is the MIMO transmission with the first node in the time division multiplexing mode
  • the SRS resource set corresponding to the parameter; the resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
  • the network device configuration resource set and the set of first reference signal resources are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby solving the problem of space division
  • the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
  • the first node receives the first resource set sent by the network device, including:
  • the first node receives the set of first reference signal resources configured by the network device according to the second parameter and the resource set configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
  • the network device configuration resource set and the set of first reference signal resources are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby solving the problem of space division
  • the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
  • the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
  • the network device configures the resource set according to the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
  • the network device configures the resource set, which helps the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and uses the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thus solving the problem of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission.
  • the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
  • the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signal resources; wherein, the set of multiple reference signal resources is configured based on the third parameter, and the one reference signal resource reference signal resources in the set of , with the same function; or
  • the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, wherein the set of reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources correspondingly configured based on the third parameter.
  • the resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the first node
  • the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is the resource set that is the resources of multiple reference signals.
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device
  • each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources
  • the reference signal resources refer to SRS resource.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set.
  • the upper-level IAB node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the IAB relay node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
  • the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources
  • the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource
  • one or more SRS resources corresponding to MIMO parameters in the same working mode are SRS resources configured by the network device.
  • the network equipment is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource in the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources).
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
  • the network device receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node;
  • the network device configures a first resource set, and sends the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the network device after receiving multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the first node, the network device configures corresponding SRS resources for it. In this way, when the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, it can select the corresponding SRS resources. , to effectively avoid problems such as strong interference.
  • the network device refers to a device such as a base station that can realize wireless signal transmission between a wired communication network and a wireless terminal.
  • the MIMO parameters in the different working modes include:
  • the number of available ports in the different working modes the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • a port refers to an antenna port, or port for short, which is a logical port.
  • the MIMO parameters include the number of available ports, the relationship between the available ports, and the number of available panels, and the working mode corresponding to the MIMO parameters can be explicitly or implicitly reflected through the above three pieces of information.
  • the first node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes.
  • the network device configures multiple sets of SRS resources according to the multiple sets of reported MIMO parameters.
  • the first node uses the corresponding configuration of SRS resources in different working modes, and uses MIMO uplink transmission signals. In this way, it is beneficial for the network device to configure the corresponding SRS resources.
  • the first node When transmitting signals to the second node, the first node can use the SRS resources adapted to the working mode in which it is located, and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resources to The second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
  • the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the sets of multiple reference signal resources respectively correspond to MIMO parameters in the different working modes; wherein each The set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
  • the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding respectively; each type of reference signal resource includes one or more reference signal resources.
  • the first resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the IAB node.
  • the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is that the first resource set is a plurality of reference signals.
  • the set of resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource, and there is one or more reference signal resources in each SRS resource set, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set.
  • the second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the MIMO transmission is restricted due to hardware problems of the first node.
  • the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, and multiple reference signal resources in the SRS resource set
  • the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource
  • one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode
  • the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first I node to select the SRS resource suitable for the working mode in which it is located (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources) and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the first node generates self-interference, and the first node generates self-interference.
  • a technical problem in which the MIMO transmission is limited due to hardware problems of the node equipment.
  • configuring the first resource set by the network device further includes:
  • the network device configures corresponding identifiers for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively;
  • the network device configures corresponding identifiers for a plurality of reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively.
  • the network device configures a corresponding identifier for each SRS resource set; if When the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the network device will configure an identifier for each SRS resource.
  • the configuration identifier can effectively distinguish each SRS resource.
  • the network device after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
  • the network device sends the information of the first resource set to the second node.
  • the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device.
  • the network device After configuring the SRS resources, the network device will send the information of the SRS resources and the information of the MIMO parameters reported by the first node to the second node (the second node is the upper-level node of the first node), so that the second node is the first node Select resources such as SRS resource.
  • the network device receives MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node, including:
  • the network device receiving, by the network device, the second parameter reported by the first node; wherein the second parameter is the MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode;
  • the network device receives a third parameter reported by the first node based on the first request signaling; wherein the third parameter is a parameter of another mode other than the first working mode.
  • the network device there is another way for the network device to receive the MIMO parameters reported by the first node.
  • the network device first receives the MIMO parameters in the corresponding time division multiplexing mode reported by the first node. Then, the network device sends first request signaling to the first node, where the first request signaling is used to instruct the first node to report one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to other working modes.
  • the network device receives the MIMO parameters and configured SRS resources reported by the first node according to the first request signaling.
  • the second parameter may be a MIMO parameter in a time division multiplexing mode reported by the first node; the first working mode is a time division multiplexing mode; the third parameter may be the first The MIMO parameter reported by the node according to the first request signaling; the network device may refer to a device such as a network device that can implement wireless signal transmission between a wired communication network and a wireless terminal.
  • the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
  • the network device configures a set of first reference signal resources according to the second parameter, and sends the set of first reference signal resources to the first node; wherein the set of first reference signal resources Including multiple reference signal resources with the same function;
  • the network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
  • the second parameter is the MIMO transmission parameter of the first node in the time division multiplexing mode
  • the set of the first reference signal resources is the MIMO transmission with the first node in the time division multiplexing mode
  • the SRS resource set corresponding to the parameter; the resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
  • the network equipment configuration resource set and the set of the first reference signal resources are helpful for the first node to select the SRS resource most suitable for the current working mode, and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, Therefore, in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the self-interference of the IAB relay node and the technical problems of the limited MIMO transmission caused by the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment are solved.
  • the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
  • the network device configures a set of first reference signal resources according to the second parameter; wherein, the set of first reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources with the same function;
  • the network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set and the set of the first reference signal to the first node.
  • the network device configuration resource set and the first reference signal resource set are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby It solves the technical problems that the IAB relay node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
  • the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
  • the network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
  • the network device configures the resource set, which is helpful for the first node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thereby solving the problem of space division transmission and uplink transmission.
  • the first node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the first node causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
  • the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signal resources; wherein, the set of multiple reference signal resources is configured based on the third parameter, and the one reference signal resource reference signal resources in the set of , with the same function; or
  • the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, wherein the set of reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources correspondingly configured based on the third parameter.
  • the resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the first node
  • the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is the resource set that is the resources of multiple reference signals.
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device
  • each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources
  • the reference signal resources refer to SRS resource.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource set in the SRS resource set that is most suitable for the current working mode, and use the SRS resource set in the SRS resource set.
  • the configuration information transmits signals to the second node, thereby solving the technical problems of self-interference generated by the first node and limited MIMO transmission caused by hardware problems of the first node in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission.
  • the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources
  • the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set
  • the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources
  • the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource
  • one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode
  • the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device.
  • the network device is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource most suitable for its working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources).
  • SRS resource and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that the first node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the first node equipment causes MIMO Technical issues where transmission is restricted.
  • the network device after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
  • the network device receives the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the first indication information is a scheduling signaling sent by the network device to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the network device;
  • the first reference signal resource is: The SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling;
  • the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the network device.
  • the first node will send the unavailable TPMI to the network device after sending the SRS signal, and the TPMI of the TPMI will be sent to the network device.
  • the role is used to indicate the precoding matrix.
  • the first node provides a reference when the network device selects the precoding matrix from the codebook, so that the network device can avoid those when using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the precoding matrix. , a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
  • the network device after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
  • the network device sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node
  • the network device receives the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the second indication information is a scheduling signaling sent by the network device to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send the SRS signal to the network device;
  • the second reference signal resource is: The SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling;
  • the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the network device;
  • the first channel state reference signal is the CSI-RS signal.
  • the network device sends a scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used to let the first node send the SRS signal to the network device.
  • the network device transmits a signal, in addition to sending a scheduling signaling to the first node, the network device also sends a CSI-RS signal to the first node for the first node to estimate an uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix.
  • the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the network device, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource.
  • the first node can give the network device a reference when selecting the SRS resource, so that the network device can avoid those using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, which is characterized by comprising:
  • the second node sends the first indication information to the first node
  • the second node receiving, by the second node, the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
  • the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  • the first indication information is scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node;
  • the first reference signal The resource is the SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling;
  • the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node.
  • the first node When the first node transmits a signal to the second node based on the codebook, the first node sends an unavailable TPMI to the second node after sending the SRS signal, and the function of the TPMI is to indicate the precoding matrix.
  • the first node can give the second node a reference when selecting a precoding matrix in the codebook, so that the second node can avoid those problems that may affect the first node when selecting a precoding matrix.
  • a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
  • the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
  • the indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • a port refers to an antenna port, abbreviated as a port, which is a logical port;
  • the first indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI under the different working modes.
  • the precoding matrices indicated in the codebooks corresponding to different working modes may be different, and the indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate which working mode corresponds to the TPMI sent by the first node. codebook, avoiding the situation where one TPMI indicates precoding matrices in multiple codebooks.
  • the method before the second node sends the first indication information to the first node, the method further includes:
  • the second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
  • the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device.
  • the network device After configuring the SRS resources, the network device will send the information of the SRS resources and the information of the MIMO parameters reported by the first node to the second node (the second node is the upper-level node of the first node), so that the second node is the first node Select resources such as SRS resource.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
  • the second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node
  • the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  • the second indication information is scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node;
  • the second reference signal The resource is the SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling;
  • the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node;
  • the first channel state reference signal is the CSI-RS signal.
  • the second node When the first node transmits signals to the second node in a non-codebook-based manner, the second node will not only send a scheduling signaling to the first node, but also send a CSI-RS signal to the first node for The first node estimates the uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix.
  • the first node after sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the second node, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource.
  • the first node can give the second node a reference when selecting the SRS resource, so that the second node can avoid those using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource.
  • SRS resource that may cause problems such as strong interference.
  • the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
  • the indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  • the port refers to an antenna port, referred to as a port, which is a logical port;
  • the second indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable SRIs under the different working modes.
  • the indicated SRS resource may also be different.
  • the indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode the SRI sent by the first node corresponds to, avoiding the problem that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
  • the method before the second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node, the method further includes:
  • the second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
  • the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device.
  • the second node Before sending the scheduling signaling to the first node, the second node will accept the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, so that the second node can select resources such as SRS resource for the first node.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a first node, including:
  • a reporting unit used to report the MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a first resource set sent by the network device; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • a first indication information receiving unit configured to receive the first indication information sent by the second node after the receiving unit receives the first resource set sent by the network device;
  • a first reference signal resource calling unit configured to use the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information
  • a first reference signal sending unit configured to send a first reference signal to the second node
  • the first information reporting unit is configured to report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the first reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
  • a first reference signal resource selection unit configured to select a first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the first state information.
  • the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • a second indication information receiving unit configured to receive the second indication information sent by the second node
  • a first channel state reference signal receiving unit configured to receive the first channel state reference signal
  • a first channel state reference signal calling unit configured to use the first channel state reference signal
  • a second reference signal resource calling unit configured to use the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information
  • the second information reporting unit is configured to report the second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the second reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
  • the second reference signal resource selection unit is configured to select the first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, wherein the apparatus for determining transmission parameters is a network device, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node
  • a resource configuration unit used to configure the first resource set
  • a sending unit configured to send the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the resource configuration unit further includes:
  • an identification configuration unit configured to respectively configure corresponding identifications for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources;
  • the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources
  • corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
  • the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • An information sending unit configured to send the information of the first resource set to the second node after the resource configuration unit configures the first resource set.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a second node, including:
  • a first indication information sending unit configured to send the first indication information to the first node
  • a first reference signal receiving unit configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information
  • a first information receiving unit configured to receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • An information receiving unit configured to receive the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a second node, including:
  • a second indication information sending unit configured to send the second indication information to the first node
  • a first channel state reference signal sending unit configured to send the first channel state reference signal to the first node
  • the second reference signal receiving unit is configured to receive the second reference signal sent by the first node based on the second indication information using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resources in the first resource set. reference signal;
  • the second information receiving unit is configured to receive the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
  • the memory is used for storing program codes
  • the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method for determining transmission parameters in the first aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
  • the memory is used for storing program codes
  • the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method for determining transmission parameters in the second aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
  • the memory is used to store program codes
  • the processor is used to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the methods for determining transmission parameters in the third aspect and the fourth aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, enables a first node to implement the first aspect and the The method for determining transmission parameters in various possible implementations thereof, or the method for determining transmission parameters in the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementations by the network device, or the second node implementing the above-mentioned third aspect and the first. Methods for determining transmission parameters in the four aspects and various possible implementations thereof.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program, where the computer program includes instructions, when the computer program is executed by a computer, so that the first node can execute the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof
  • the process performed by the first node or the network device may perform the process performed by the network device in the second aspect and its various possible implementations, or the second node may perform the third aspect and the fourth aspect and Processes executed by the second node in various possible implementation manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor configured to support the first node to implement the functions involved in the methods in the first aspect and its various possible manners, or network devices The functions involved in the method in the second aspect and its various possible manners are implemented, or the second node implements the functions involved in the methods in the third aspect and the fourth aspect and the methods in its various possible manners.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the first node or the network device or the second node.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping on a single panel of an antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an antenna multi-panel data stream mapping provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for backhaul parameter transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a codebook provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an SRS resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is an architecture diagram of a signal transmission system of a MIMO uplink provided by this embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a structural diagram of an IAB node device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a transmission flowchart of a MIMO uplink provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • an element may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these units can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a unit may, for example, be based on a signal with one or more data packets (eg, data from a second unit interacting with another unit between local systems, distributed systems, and/or networks. For example, the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the Physical Uplink Share Channel (PUSCH) is used to carry data from the transmission channel (Uplink Shared Channel, USCH).
  • the so-called sharing means that the same physical channel can be used by multiple users in time-sharing, or the channel have a shorter duration.
  • In-band relay is a relay scheme in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, in-band relay has high spectral efficiency and low deployment cost. and other advantages, in-band relays generally have half-duplex constraints.
  • IAB Integrated Access and Backhaul
  • IAB node the relay node
  • the IAB node the relay node
  • the access link and the backhaul link perform resource multiplexing by time division, space division or frequency division.
  • TDM time division multiplexing
  • the backhaul link and the access link work at different times, so the IAB node needs to switch between the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the transmission and reception of the access link.
  • the backhaul and access links are switched without interval, that is, when the symbols of the access link and the symbol backhaul link are consecutive, the IAB node has the highest resource utilization rate.
  • the IAB node needs to determine the set of available/unavailable symbols for the backhaul link and the access link.
  • the IAB node receives the configuration information of the network device, which may be received by the MT of the IAB node or by the DU of the IAB node.
  • the configuration information received by the IAB node MT is carried by RRC signaling
  • the configuration information received by the IAB node DU is carried by F1-AP interface signaling.
  • the lower-level IAB node receives the configuration sent by the network device for sending, such as SRS resource and SRS resource set configuration, which is realized by the IAB MT receiving RRC signaling; the upper-level IAB node receives the transmission from the network device and is used to receive the lower
  • the configuration of the signal sent by the node or the configuration information used to schedule the subordinate node is realized by the IAB DU receiving the F1-AP interface signaling.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • PDCCH Downlink Physical Control Channel
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • TPMI Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • SRS Resource Indicator SRI
  • SRS Resource Indicator SRI
  • the network equipment described in the claims and description of the present application refers to equipment such as base stations that can realize wireless signal transmission between wired communication networks and wireless terminals or relay nodes; wherein the base stations also include host base stations.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping on a single panel of an antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the panel generally refers to the antenna panel panel.
  • the directivity of a single antenna is limited.
  • two or more single antennas operating at the same frequency will be used according to certain It is required to carry out feeding and spatial arrangement to form an antenna array.
  • the antenna radiating element that constitutes the antenna array is called an array element, and there are multiple antenna array elements on one panel.
  • base stations and terminals use panels to improve their electromagnetic wave transmission capabilities.
  • the upper-layer service streams are channel-coded to form codewords, which are used to distinguish different data streams, so that MIMO can transmit multiple data streams and realize spatial multiplexing.
  • codewords are inconsistent with the number of transmitting antennas, and the codeword stream needs to be mapped to different transmitting antennas, so layer mapping and precoding need to be used.
  • Layer mapping and precoding are actually "mapping codewords to transmitting antennas" Two sub-processes of the "Antenna" process.
  • Layer mapping is to remap the codeword stream to multiple layers according to certain rules (there is only one layer in Figure 1), and then map the data stream on the layer to the logical ports AP0 ⁇ AP3 of the antenna through precoding. OFDM signals are generated, and then the OFDM symbols are mapped one-to-one to the antenna elements through the respective transceiver units TXRU.
  • Figure 1 it is the transmission of data from one layer to four antenna ports AP0-AP3, wherein the antenna ports AP0-AP3 are logical ports. If the port of the antenna corresponds to the same panel, and there is no delay between the ports of the antenna, coherent transmission (joint precoding) can be performed, that is, the layer can map the data stream to the data stream on the same panel through the precoding matrix.
  • the antenna port is connected to the port, and corresponding weights are assigned to the OFDM signal on the port. In this way, when MIMO is used to transmit signals to the upper node, the strength of the transmitted signal can be enhanced and the transmission efficiency can be improved.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping of an antenna multi-panel provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 shows the transmission of a layer mapping data stream to four ports.
  • the terminal often has multiple antenna panels, which can be configured at different positions of the terminal, so that the signal has more diversity in transmission time and transmission space.
  • One aspect of this design is that there are multiple antenna panels, giving the terminal more space options for transmitting signals. For example, when a user uses a smartphone to make a call, the user's palm covers an antenna panel installed on the smartphone, which affects the antenna's transmission of signals. If the antenna panel is also installed at other locations on the smartphone, the smartphone can pass The antenna panel transmits the signal so that the quality of the communication is not affected.
  • the terminal has a beamforming design, that is, by adjusting the phase between multiple antennas, the communication signals are concentrated in a certain direction, and the strength of the signal received by the base station in a certain direction is enlarged.
  • the coverage of the signal is often insufficient. Therefore, through the multi-panel design, the terminals can be in different locations and transmit signals in different directions, reducing the problem of insufficient spatial coverage caused by beamforming. .
  • logical ports port AP0 and port AP2 are on panel 1
  • logical ports port AP1 and port AP3 are on panel 2.
  • One logical port port of an antenna corresponds to multiple physical antennas, and the signal transmitted by the antenna corresponding to one logical port port only has an offset in phase, and other characteristics are the same.
  • the transmission delay between the panels is caused by hardware reasons. Therefore, the antenna logical port ports between different panels cannot be coherently transmitted, that is, cannot be jointly precoded.
  • the codeword stream is mapped to a layer through layer mapping.
  • the layer maps the data stream to the antenna logical port ports AP0 ⁇ AP3 through two precoding, and then
  • the OFDM signal is generated by digital beamforming and mapping of resource particles, and the generated OFDM signal is sent to the transceiver unit TXRU, and the transceiver unit performs analog beamforming on the OFDM signal received by the transceiver unit, that is, the logic is given by the precoding matrix.
  • the weight of the OFDM signal on the port, the phase shifter is used to complete the adjustment of the antenna phase, and then the signal is transmitted.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for backhaul parameter transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • IAB is divided into a mobile terminal MT (Mobile-Termination, MT) module and a distributed unit DU (Distributed Unit, DU) module:
  • the function of the MT module is defined as a UE-like component, which can be understood as the IAB node accesses the upper level through the MT Node/Network.
  • the DU function is relative to the centralized unit CU (Centralized Unit, CU) function.
  • CU Centralized Unit
  • the base station function is divided into two parts called CU-DU separation.
  • the CU includes the RRC layer and the PDCP layer of the original LTE base station, and the DU includes the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the PHY physical layer.
  • CU and DU can be physically connected by optical fiber, and there is a specially defined F1 interface logically for communication between CU and DU.
  • CU is mainly responsible for radio resource control and configuration, cross-cell mobility management, bearer management, etc.
  • DU is mainly responsible for scheduling resources configured by CU, and generating and sending physical signals.
  • the second node is the upper-level node of the first node.
  • the MT of the first node Before the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, the MT of the first node should report the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the second node. the data package.
  • the DU of the second node receives the data packet of the MIMO parameter reported by the MT of the first node, and sends the data packet of the MIMO parameter to the CU of the second node through the F1 interface.
  • the CU of the second node configures an SRS resource set corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode according to the MIMO parameters, and then sends the data packet of the SRS resource set to the DU of the second node through the F1 interface.
  • the DU of the second node passes the data packets of the SRS resource set configured by the CU of the second node through the air interface (in a mobile communication network, the air interface is the interface between the base station and the mobile terminal, and the communication between the mobile phone or the wireless modem and the base station is the interface between the base station and the mobile terminal. interface) to the MT of the first node.
  • the MT of the first node receives the data packet of the SRS resource set, it is processed at the MT adaptation layer of the second node, and the processed data packet is forwarded to the DU module of the second node for processing, and finally passes through the DU module. Parse out the data packet of the SRS resource set.
  • the second node sends an indication message to the first node through its DU module, where the indication message is used to instruct the first node to send an SRS signal to the second node.
  • the MT of the first node After receiving the indication information, the MT of the first node sends the processed indication information to the DU of the first node through the F1 interface, and parses it.
  • the MT of the first node selects a corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the parsed indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the second node according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the DU of the second node parses the SRS signal, and sends the parsed information to the CU of the second node through the F1 interface.
  • the information of the signal generates control information
  • the control information is used to instruct the MT of the first node to select the corresponding SRS resource
  • the DU of the second node sends the control information to the MT of the first node
  • the MT of the first node is based on the control
  • the information selects the corresponding SRS resource, and transmits a signal to the DU of the second node according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • several precoding matrices can be used to form a codebook, and the content of this codebook is known by both the UE and the gNB (base station).
  • the protocol defines a variety of codebooks, and a codebook is a collection of multiple precoding matrices, which can support UEs with various hardware conditions to perform uplink transmission in various scenarios.
  • there are three main relationships between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE namely: all antenna ports are non-coherent (Non coherence), some antenna ports are coherent (Partical coherence), and all antenna ports are coherent (Full coherence).
  • FIG. 5 lists the codebooks defined by some protocols and the relationship of the corresponding transmission schemes implicitly behind them.
  • the gNB can only select a precoding matrix with TPMI 0; if the relationship between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE is Partical coherence, then the gNB can choose from If the TPMI is 0 ⁇ 2, the precoding matrix suitable for UE MIMO uplink transmission data is selected; if the relationship between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE is Full coherence, then the gNB can select the suitable UE MIMO from TPMI 0 ⁇ 4. Precoding matrix for uplink transmission data. Then, after the UE reports the relationship between the antenna ports to the gNB, the gNB can determine the range of the corresponding precoding matrix, thereby narrowing the range of the precoding matrix selected by the gNB.
  • the gNB When the gNB receives the SRS signal sent by the terminal, it can estimate the uplink channel and obtain the information of the uplink channel. Based on the information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the terminal, the gNB can select the appropriate precoding matrix from the codebook for the terminal, and Relevant information such as the precoding matrix is sent to the terminal, and the terminal performs uplink data transmission according to the instruction of the information sent by the gNB. As shown in Figure 4, the process of uplink transmission in UE's MIMO based on a codebook is as follows:
  • Step S401 The UE reports a set of MIMO parameters to the gNB.
  • the UE Before the UE transmits the uplink signal to the gNB using MIMO, it needs to report its MIMO parameters to the gNB.
  • the MIMO parameters specifically include: the number of available ports of the antenna, the relationship between the antenna ports, and information such as available panels.
  • the MIMO parameters reported by the UE to the gNB are the MIMO parameters when the UE is in a time division multiplexing mode.
  • the UE reports MIMO parameters to the gNB, so that the gNB can know its MIMO related information, configure SRS resources for the UE according to its MIMO parameters, and schedule the codebook required by the UE for uplink transmission.
  • Step S402 The gNB configures SRS resources according to the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and sends the configured SRS resources to the UE.
  • the gNB configures SRS resources for the UE.
  • the SRS resource is an SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource set is a collection of multiple SRS resources. Since the UE has multiple panels, or the signals are transmitted in multiple directions after beamforming, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set.
  • an SRS resource set can be regarded as a functional unit. This functional unit can only have one purpose of use. Multiple SRS resources in an SRS resource set have the same purpose of use.
  • the number of ports configured by the SRS resource in an SRS resource set is the same.
  • an SRI is configured for each SRS resource, which is used by the gNB to indicate which SRS resource the UE should use.
  • FIG. 6 is a structural diagram of an SRS resource provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the SRS resource set is codebook-based uplink transmission, only two SRS resources can be configured at most.
  • the resource can be configured with up to 4 antenna ports.
  • the configuration of the SRS resource includes:
  • NR SRS can be configured with up to 4 antenna ports
  • NR SRS can be configured with up to 4 OFDM symbols
  • NR SRS can be located in 1, 2, and 4 consecutive symbols in the last 6 symbols in a slot time slot;
  • Frequency domain location The frequency domain location of the NR SRS is related to the partial bandwidth of the UE.
  • Step S403 the gNB sends indication information to the UE.
  • the UE before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will receive an indication message sent by the gNB, where the indication message includes one or more SRIs.
  • the role of the SRI is to instruct the UE to use a certain SRS resource in the SRS resource set.
  • step S402 since signals are transmitted in multiple directions after the UE beamforming, and the UE is installed with multiple panels, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set.
  • the gNB may only send one SRI to instruct the UE to call the SRS resource corresponding to the SRI, and the UE sends a sounding signal to the gNB based on the SRS resource; or , the gNB may also send multiple SRIs to instruct the UE to invoke multiple SRS resources corresponding to the multiple SRIs, and the UE sends SRS signals to the gNB respectively based on the multiple SRS resources.
  • Step S404 The UE receives the indication information sent by the gNB, and uses the selected SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the gNB.
  • the UE selects a corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the SRI in the indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB based on the configuration information in the SRS resource.
  • the UE selects the SRS resource corresponding to the SRI from the SRS resource set, respectively, And based on the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, the SRS signal is respectively sent to the gNB, for example, the SRS signal is sent to the gNB according to the port configured in the selected SRS resource.
  • Step S405 The gNB generates a DCI signal according to the SRS signal and MIMO parameters sent by the UE, and sends the DCI signal to the UE.
  • the gNB obtains the status information of the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the UE, and the gNB selects a prediction suitable for the UE MIMO uplink transmission data from the codebook by analyzing the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE. encoding matrix.
  • the multi-channel SRS signal sent by the UE multiple ports may be configured in the SRS resource selected by the UE
  • the number Rank of the ports that call the UE is determined.
  • the indication information sent by the gNB contains multiple SRIs
  • the gNB will receive multiple SRS signals.
  • the gNB will also select a suitable UE based on the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE.
  • SRS resource for MIMO uplink transmission data is the multi-channel SRS signal sent by the UE.
  • the gNB sends information such as the TPMI of the selected precoding matrix, the indication information RI of the Rank, and the SRI of the SRS resource to the UE through a DCI signal.
  • the TPMI is used to instruct the UE to use the precoding matrix selected by the gNB
  • the RI is used to indicate which ports the UE uses to transmit the SRS signal
  • the SRI is used to instruct the UE to invoke the SRS resource selected by the gNB.
  • Step S406 The UE receives the DCI signal, and transmits the signal through the uplink using MIMO based on the DCI signal.
  • the UE After the UE receives the DCI signal, it transmits the uplink signal through the information in the DCI signal.
  • the specific process is as follows: the UE selects the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set through the SRI in the DCI signal; The TPMI selects the corresponding precoding matrix in the codebook. The UE assigns the corresponding weight to the signal to be sent by the precoding matrix it selects, and sends the signal to the gNB based on the configuration information (such as the configured port) in the SRS resource.
  • This embodiment introduces a MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method.
  • the UE first reports its corresponding MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the gNB, so that the gNB configures the corresponding SRS resources according to the reported MIMO parameters, that is, the gNB configuration
  • An SRS resource set, an SRS resource set contains one or more SRS resources with the same function.
  • the gNB sends the configured SRS resource set to the UE, and then sends an indication message for the UE to send the SRS signal to the gNB.
  • the UE After receiving the indication information, the UE selects a corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set according to the SRI in the indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the gNB can obtain the information of the uplink channel through the SRS signal, and select the appropriate precoding matrix from the codebook for the UE based on the information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, determine the Rank, and SRI and other information, and pass this information through the DCI
  • the signal is sent downlink to the UE.
  • the UE After receiving the DCI signal, the UE sends the signal to the gNB according to the TPMI, SRI and other information therein.
  • the UE uses MIMO to transmit uplink signals by means of a codebook, which can reduce the influence of interference caused by the signals in the uplink transmission process, and greatly improve the capacity of the MIMO system.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method of MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission is: UE no longer transmits uplink signals according to the codebook defined by the protocol, but calculates the precoding matrix according to the relevant CSI-RS, so as to adjust the weight of the uplink channel. value.
  • the process of using MIMO for the UE to perform uplink transmission based on the non-codebook mode is as follows:
  • Step S701 The UE reports a set of MIMO parameters to the gNB.
  • the UE before using MIMO to transmit signals to the gNB in a non-codebook manner, the UE shall report its corresponding MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the gNB.
  • the MIMO parameters specifically include: the number of available ports of the antenna, the relationship between the antenna ports, and information such as available panels.
  • the UE transmits the MIMO parameters to the gNB so that the gNB can know the relevant information of the MIMO parameters of the UE, and then configures the relevant SRS resources for the UE.
  • Step S702 The gNB configures SRS resources and CSI-RS signals according to the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and sends the configured SRS resources and CSI-RS signals to the UE.
  • the gNB After receiving the MIMO parameters sent by the UE, the gNB configures SRS resources for the UE.
  • the SRS resource is an SRS resource set.
  • the SRS resource set is a collection of multiple SRS resources. Since the UE has multiple panels, or the signals are transmitted in multiple directions after beamforming, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set.
  • an SRS resource set can be regarded as a functional unit. This functional unit can only have one purpose of use. Multiple SRS resources in an SRS resource set have the same purpose of use.
  • one SRS resource set contains at most four SRS resources, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port.
  • the gNB uses the SRS resource set as the unit to configure the corresponding CSI-RS signal.
  • the role of the CSI-RS signal is to allow the UE to estimate the downlink channel.
  • an SRI is configured for each SRS resource, which is used by the gNB to indicate which SRS resource the UE should use.
  • the gNB sends its configured SRS resource and CSI-RS to the UE.
  • Step S703 the gNB sends indication information to the UE.
  • the UE before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will receive an indication message sent by the gNB, and the indication message includes the SRI corresponding to all the SRS resources in the SRS resource set.
  • the role of the SRI is to instruct the UE to use the SRS resource in the SRS resource set.
  • step S702 since signals are transmitted in multiple directions after the UE beamforming, and the UE is installed with multiple panels, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set.
  • Step S704 The UE estimates the downlink channel according to the received CSI-RS signal, obtains the downlink channel matrix, determines the information of the uplink channel matrix according to the downlink channel matrix, and obtains a precoding matrix H by performing operation processing on the uplink channel matrix.
  • the UE estimates the downlink channel, obtains the information of the downlink channel, and obtains a downlink channel matrix according to the obtained information of the downlink channel.
  • AP3 sends a CSI-RS signal to the UE, and there are four antenna ports BP0-BP3 on the UE side to receive the CSI-RS signal. Then a 4x4 downlink channel matrix can be obtained:
  • the UE After obtaining the downlink channel matrix, the UE can obtain the uplink channel matrix according to the obtained downlink channel matrix. It is assumed that the uplink channel matrix and the downlink channel matrix are in a transposed relationship, that is: Then the upstream channel matrix is:
  • the UE converts the uplink channel matrix After arithmetic processing, such as eigenvalue decomposition (SVD decomposition), the weight of the SRS sent by the UE uplink is calculated, and a precoding matrix H is obtained.
  • arithmetic processing such as eigenvalue decomposition (SVD decomposition)
  • the weight of the SRS sent by the UE uplink is calculated, and a precoding matrix H is obtained.
  • the calculation process of the SRS weight is as follows:
  • Each element in the above precoding matrix represents the weight of the SRS uplink transmission.
  • d 12 represents that if port1 of the UE sends SRS to the gNB, port2 of the gNB receives the SRS, and the UE gives the SRS when sending the SRS.
  • the weight of the SRS is d 12 .
  • Step S705 The UE receives the indication information sent by the gNB, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB based on the SRS resource and the precoding matrix H.
  • the UE after receiving the indication information sent by the gNB, the UE selects the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the SRI of the UE in the indication information, and sends the SRS signal to the gNB respectively based on the configuration port in the SRS resource. In addition, before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will assign a corresponding weight to the SRS signal to be sent based on the precoding matrix H.
  • Step S706 The gNB generates a DCI signal based on the SRS signal and MIMO parameters sent by the UE, and sends the DCI signal to the UE.
  • the gNB obtains the status information of the uplink channel according to the multi-channel SRS signals sent by the UE, and the gNB determines the incoherent multi-channel SRS signals by analyzing the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and calculates the MIMO channel matrix (The rank of the channel matrix represents the number of incoherent signals in the multi-channel signals sent by the UE to the gNB), and the number of DMRS ports to call the UE is determined according to the status of the uplink channel.
  • the precoding matrix invoked by the UE is:
  • the gNB sends the RI of the rank of the channel matrix, the RI of the SRS resource, the DMRS port indictor and other information to the UE through a DCI signal.
  • RI is used to indicate the effective data layer number of the MIMO channel
  • SRI is used to indicate that the UE invokes the SRS resource selected by the gNB
  • the DMRS port indicator is used to indicate the DMRS port.
  • Step S707 The UE receives the DCI signal, and transmits the signal through the uplink using MIMO according to the DCI signal and the precoding matrix H.
  • the UE after receiving the DCI signal, the UE sends an uplink signal to the gUE by using the information in the DCI signal and using the precoding matrix and the corresponding port.
  • the UE before using MIMO to send an uplink signal to the gNB, the UE needs to report its MIMO parameters to the gNB.
  • the gNB configures corresponding SRS resources and CSI-RS signals for the UE according to the reported MIMO parameters.
  • the UE needs to estimate the downlink channel according to the CSI-RS signal configured by the gNB, and according to the difference between the downlink channel and the uplink channel.
  • the uplink channel is determined by the relationship, the information of the channel matrix of the uplink channel is obtained, and the precoding matrix is calculated according to the channel matrix of the uplink channel.
  • the UE After receiving the indication information of the gNB, the UE selects the SRS resource indicated by the indication information, assigns the corresponding weight to the SRS signal to be sent based on the precoding matrix, and assigns the weighted value based on the port and other information configured in the selected SRS resource.
  • the SRS signal is sent to the gNB.
  • the gNB obtains the information of the uplink channel through the SRS signal, calls the antenna port of the UE based on the information of the uplink channel and MIMO parameters, and sends the information such as SRI, RI, and DMRS port indicator to the UE through the DCI signal.
  • the UE transmits the uplink signal through MIMO through the indication in the DCI signal.
  • MIMO performs uplink signal transmission based on a non-codebook, and the UE can obtain a precoding matrix according to the CSI-RS signal, which gives the UE great flexibility.
  • FIG. 8 is an architectural diagram of a MIMO uplink signal transmission system provided in this embodiment.
  • the system architecture includes a network device, a first node, a second node, and two terminal devices UE, wherein the first node and the second node may be an IAB relay node, and the second node is an upper-level node of the first node.
  • FIG. 8 takes two IAB relay nodes and two UEs as examples for description. In the following, this embodiment is described by taking the network device as the base station, the first node as the IAB node 1, and the second node as the IAB node 2 as an example.
  • IAB node 1 using the MIMO technology to perform uplink signal transmission to its superior node IAB node 1 is as follows:
  • the IAB node 2 Before the IAB node 2 uses MIMO for uplink signal transmission, it reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station respectively.
  • the base station configures the first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters it receives, and sends the configured first resource set to the IAB node 1; the base station also configures the related information of the first resource set and/or the IAB The information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the node 1 is sent to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 2 sends indication information to the IAB node 1 to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to it.
  • the state information sent by the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the first resource set, and selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the indication information, and then according to the configuration in the selected SRS resource The information sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal according to the SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1 and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, which is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to transmit signals to the IAB node 2 using MIMO.
  • the IAB node 1 receives the DCI signal, and uses MIMO to transmit the signal to the IAB node 2 according to the indication information in the DCI signal.
  • the lower-level IAB node before the lower-level IAB node transmits signals to the upper-level IAB node through MIMO, it must first report multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station, and the base station configures corresponding SRS resources according to the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters. The SRS resource is then sent to the subordinate IAB node.
  • the lower-level IAB node When the lower-level IAB node wants to transmit a signal to the upper-level IAB node through MIMO, the lower-level IAB node can select the corresponding SRS resource according to the different working modes it is currently in, and transmit the signal based on the selected SRS resource; When the IAB node needs to schedule the lower-level IAB node to perform uplink transmission through MIMO, the upper-level IAB node can generate a DCI signal according to the different working modes it is currently in, and instruct the lower-level IAB node to perform MIMO transmission parameters.
  • FIG. 9 is a structural diagram of an IAB node device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the IAB node device includes two functional modules, DU and MT, where the MT is the UE functional module of the IAB node device, that is, the IAB node communicates with the upper-level node through the MT.
  • the DU is the base station functional module of the IAB node, that is, the IAB node communicates with the subordinate nodes and the UE through the DU.
  • Both the DU and MT modules of the IAB node have complete modules for receiving and sending, and there is an interface between them. It is worth noting that both MT and DU are logical modules, and in practice, they can share some sub-modules, for example, can share transceiver antennas, baseband processing modules, and so on.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first node Before the first node transmits signals to the second node through MIMO, it first transmits MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, and the network device configures a first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters received by the network device.
  • a set includes multiple SRS resources.
  • the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, and then the first node selects the corresponding SRS resource and precoding matrix, and uses MIMO to the second node according to the configuration information and precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource. Transmission signal.
  • Figure 10 takes the first node as IAB node 1, the second node as IAB node 2, and the network device as a base station as an example, as shown in Figure 10, another MIMO codebook-based method for uplink transmission is as follows:
  • Step S1001 The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 first sends multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes respectively.
  • the different working modes include full duplex mode (FD), time division multiplexing mode (TDM) and space division multiplexing mode (SDM).
  • FD full duplex mode
  • TDM time division multiplexing mode
  • SDM space division multiplexing mode
  • the protocol specifies the MIMO parameter information corresponding to the different working modes, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station have different The identification of the working mode, when the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1, it can know which different working mode the MIMO parameters correspond to through the identification.
  • the information in the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 (the number of available ports, the relationship between ports and the number of available panels) and the relationship between different working modes to determine different working modes corresponding to MIMO parameters, for example: when the number of available ports for one set of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 is 4, The relationship between ports is partial correlation, then according to the provisions of the protocol, it can be judged that the mode corresponding to this set of MIMO parameters is not full-duplex mode; if the number of available ports of another set of MIMO parameters transmitted is 4, the If the relationship is full correlation, and panel 1 is unavailable, then, according to the protocol, it can be determined that the mode corresponding to this set of MIMO parameters is the full-duplex mode and/or the space-division multiplexing mode.
  • the MT of IAB node 1 reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively.
  • the MT of IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode and the MIMO parameters in the non-time division multiplexing mode respectively; the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode, MIMO parameters in space division multiplexing mode and MIMO parameters in full duplex mode.
  • the MT of IAB node 1 reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively.
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters that are implicitly related to the time-division multiplexing mode, the space-division multiplexing mode and the full-duplex mode; the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the restricted and MIMO parameters corresponding to the two unrestricted transmission modes.
  • the relationship between the MIMO parameters corresponding to the unrestricted transmission mode and the time division multiplexing mode is implicit, and the relationship between the MIMO parameters corresponding to the restricted transmission mode and the non-time division multiplexing mode is implicit.
  • Step S1002 the base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1;
  • the information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
  • the base station After the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters sent by the MT of IAB node 1, no matter whether the relationship between the MIMO parameters and different working modes is implicit or explicit, the base station, according to the information in the MIMO parameters, Configure the first resource set.
  • the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is an SRS resource set
  • the multiple SRS resource sets are respectively corresponding to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes
  • the multiple SRS resource sets are the SRS resources configured by the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively.
  • the base station will configure the SRS resources of these three different working modes respectively. set.
  • the functions of SRS resources in the same SRS resource set are the same, that is: if there are multiple SRS resources in the same SRS resource set, then the number of ports configured by these multiple SRS resources is the same, and the relationship between ports is also Identical (coherent, partially coherent, fully coherent).
  • the base station When the base station configures multiple SRS resource sets, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource set.
  • the identifier There are three main ways to configure the identifier. relationship, that is: the new field ⁇ SDM ⁇ in the SRS resource set is used to indicate that the SRS resource set corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the SRS resource set is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field.
  • the second method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node.
  • the protocol stipulates that the SRS resource set numbered 0 is the SRS resource set used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the IAB When the MT of the node 1 sends the indication information, it will send the third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, and the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the numbers of the SRS resource set; wherein, the third indication information It is generated according to the information that the numbers correspond to different working modes sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 .
  • the MT of IAB node 1 when the MT of IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource set, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource set corresponds to through the identifier in it; through the third method above, the base station The SRS resource set is only numbered to distinguish the SRS resource set.
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured multiple SRS resource sets to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the multiple SRS resource sets and the MIMO parameter information reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
  • the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is the SRS resource set.
  • the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, the multiple SRS resources correspond to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes, and the multiple SRS resources SRS resources configured for the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively.
  • one or more SRS resources are allowed to correspond to a working mode.
  • the base station When the base station configures multiple SRS resources, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource. There are mainly three ways to configure the identifier.
  • the first method is that the base station explicitly configures the relationship between the SRS resource and different working modes. For example, a new field ⁇ SDM ⁇ is added in the SRS resource to indicate that the SRS resource corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the function of the SRS resource is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field;
  • the second The method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resources (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node, for example: the protocol specifies the number
  • the SRS resource of 0 is the SRS resource used for TDM transmission;
  • the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the instruction information to the MT of
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the first resource set and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
  • the base station after receiving the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will not configure SRS resources for it immediately, only when the base station receives the SRS resource configuration request message sent by the IAB node 1 After the command, the base station configures SRS resources for it.
  • this embodiment illustrates the SRS resource configuration request signaling as an example.
  • the IAB node 1 sends five sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. If the IAB node 1 needs the base station to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters, the IAB node 1 sends the SRS resource configuration request signaling to the base station.
  • the resource configuration request signaling includes a request to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters. After receiving the SRS resource configuration request signaling, the base station will configure the first four correspondingly according to the content of the SRS resource configuration request signaling.
  • SRS resource set of MIMO parameters For the process of configuring the SRS resource set, refer to the configuration process of the SRS resource set in the first possible implementation manner in step S1002, which will not be repeated here.
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured SRS resource set, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the SRS resource set and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
  • the SRS resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to different working modes. For example, there are three SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and these three SRS resources correspond to the three working modes of full duplex, time division and space division respectively. In addition, there are also situations where multiple SRS resources correspond to one working mode. For example, there are 5 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, three of which correspond to the space division working mode, and the other two correspond to time division and full Duplex working mode; when there are multiple SRS resources corresponding to one working mode, the number of ports configured by these multiple SRS resources is the same.
  • Step S1003 the IAB node 2 sends the first indication information to the IAB node 1
  • the IAB node 2 sends first indication information to the IAB node 1, where the first indication information is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2; wherein, the first indication information includes one or more SRIs , used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resource, and transmit the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • Step S1004 Based on the first indication information, the IAB node 1 sends the first reference signal to the IAB node 2 by using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1 according to the first state information; and according to the SRI in the first indication information, An SRS resource is selected from the selected SRS resources, and then a first reference signal is sent to the IAB node 1 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, where the first reference signal is an SRS signal.
  • the first state information includes: uplink timing information of the IAB node 1 or time-frequency resource configuration information of the DU module and CU module of the IAB node 1 or resource configuration of the MT/DU of the IAB node 1 and scheduling information or some definitions binding agreement.
  • the IAB node 1 mainly selects the SRS resource according to the first state information in the following four ways:
  • the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources corresponding to the working modes. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing in the space division transmission mode, the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources in the space division multiplexing mode.
  • the IAB node 2 determines the SRS resource that should be used by the MT of the IAB node 1 according to the time domain resource configuration information of the DU and the MT of the IAB node 1, and sends an SRI indication to it.
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode it selects according to the resource configuration of its MT/DU and the information of the scheduling situation. For example, if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the full-duplex working mode The SRS resource corresponding to the duplex mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 2 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission, then , the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode is selected by defining constraints (without other indication or signaling). It can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the full-duplex mode; or, for the DU resources of IAB node 1 in the opposite transmission direction, IAB node 2 can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode. .
  • the IAB node 1 After selecting the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, the IAB node 1 will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information, and the selection methods mainly include the following two methods:
  • the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding field according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information , and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set from the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 2 sends a third indication information to the IAB node 1, where the third indication information is used to indicate the difference between the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set and the different working modes corresponding relationship.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the third indication information and the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set in the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information, and then according to the selected SRS resource set The configuration information in the SRS resource, send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding field according to the first state information, and according to the first indication information Select the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource of the selected field, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the first state information, and according to the SRI in the first indication information, selects the corresponding numbered SRS resource. Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 2 sends the third indication information to the IAB node 1.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the correspondence between the numbers of the SRS resource sets in the first resource set and different working modes.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the third indication information and the first state information, and according to the SRI in the first indication information, the selected SRS resource (the same working mode may correspond to multiple Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource), and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • Step S1005 The IAB node 1 reports the first information to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource according to the first indication information and the first state information, and after sending the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, reports the first information to the IAB node 2, so
  • the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the unavailable TPMI may cause problems such as strong interference when the IAB node 1 in the current working mode transmits the uplink signal to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 2 By sending the indication information of the unavailable TPMI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the precoding matrix from the codebook without considering the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the TPMI. To a certain extent, the scope of searching the precoding matrix by the IAB node 2 is also reduced.
  • the number of available ports is different, and for different numbers of ports, the precoding matrix corresponding to TPMI is also different.
  • the space division multiplexing mode of the IAB node is compared with the time division multiplexing mode, the number of available ports is different, and the understanding of the same TPMI is also different.
  • Table 1 and Table 2 respectively correspond to a codebook with 4 available ports and a codebook with 2 available ports.
  • the indication information of different working modes may indicate the precoding matrix in the codebook under which working mode the indication information of the TPMI corresponds to.
  • Step S1006 the IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal based on the information of the first reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
  • the IAB node 2 receives the first reference signal sent by the IAB node 1, where the first reference signal is an SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, and estimates the uplink channel through the SRS signal to obtain the information of the uplink channel.
  • the base station After configuring the SRS resources, the base station sends the information of the configured SRS resources and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2, and the IAB node 2 obtains the uplink channel information and MIMO parameters based on it.
  • the most suitable precoding matrix is selected for IAB node 2 in the codebook.
  • step S1003 If in step S1003, the number of SRIs in the indication information sent by the IAB node 2 is multiple, the IAB node 2 selects the most suitable SRS resource for the IAB node 1. Then the IAB node 2 puts information such as the TPMI corresponding to the selected precoding matrix and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
  • Step S1007 IAB node 1 transmits a signal to IAB node 2 using MIMO based on the DCI signal.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource and precoding matrix corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1 according to the SRI and TPMI in the DCI signal, and according to the selected SRS resource For the configured port, IAB node 1 selects the corresponding port. According to the selected precoding matrix, IAB node 1 adds a weight to the signal sent by the selected port, and transmits the weighted signal to IAB node 2 through the selected port. The transmission of signals to the IAB node 2 using MIMO is implemented.
  • step S1004 when the IAB node 1 receives the first indication information sent by the IAB node 2, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects from the selected SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information
  • the corresponding SRS resource is similar.
  • the IAB node 1 After receiving the TPMI in the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 uses the current working mode of the IAB node 1 or the relevant parameters in combination with the working mode, from the codebook of the corresponding working mode, according to the The above TPMI selects the precoding matrix. There are mainly three ways to achieve this:
  • the TPMI indication received by the IAB node 1 is the number of ports supported by the transmission of the corresponding working mode and the corresponding codebook. the precoding matrix. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing using the space division transmission mode, the MT of the IAB node 1 understands that the received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the space division multiplexing transmission, the number of ports in the corresponding codebook precoding matrix.
  • the power control command implicitly indicates the location where the IAB node 1 is located.
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 understands that the TPMI indication it receives is the number of ports supported by the transmission in the corresponding working mode and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook.
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 understands, according to the resource configuration and scheduling of its MT/DU, the number of ports and the corresponding codebook that the TPMI it receives indicates which working mode transmission supports.
  • the precoding matrix in .
  • the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 understands that The received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the full-duplex working mode transmission and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook; if the IAB node 2 schedules the IAB node 2 at the location of the resources sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1 The MT transmits the uplink signal, which means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission.
  • the IAB node 1 understands that the TPMI it receives indicates the number of ports supported by the space division working mode transmission and the corresponding code.
  • the precoding matrix in this book if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the resource position of the DU NA of the IAB node 1, it means that the current working mode of the IAB node 2 is the time division multiplexing mode, Then, the IAB node 1 understands that the received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the time division multiplexing mode transmission and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook.
  • the subordinate node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station before transmitting the uplink signal to the superior node (IAB node 2) using MIMO, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes.
  • the base station After receiving the MIMO parameters reported by the subordinate node, the base station configures multiple sets of SRS resources, and the SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes.
  • the base station sends the SRS resource to the lower node, and sends the information of the SRS resource and the information of the MIMO parameter to the upper node.
  • the upper-level node sends the first indication information to the lower-level node, and the lower-level node selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource in the selected SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information, and According to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, the SRS signal is sent to the upper node.
  • the lower-level node After sending the signal to the higher-level node, the lower-level node sends the first information to the upper-level node for reference in selecting a precoding matrix from the codebook corresponding to the working mode for the upper-level node.
  • the upper-level node estimates the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the lower-level node, obtains the information of the uplink channel, sends the DCI signal to the lower-level node based on the information of the uplink channel, SRS resources and MIMO parameters, and the downlink node selects the SRS resource according to the information in the DCI signal. and precoding matrix, and based on the configuration information and precoding matrix in the SRS resource, use MIMO to transmit signals to the upper node.
  • the subordinate node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station and obtains multiple sets of SRS resources.
  • the subordinate node When the subordinate node is in other working modes, it selects the SRS resources and precoding matrix of the corresponding working mode, and uses MIMO to transmit signals to the superior node. Problems such as self-interference caused when the subordinate node is in other working modes (for example, the subordinate node is in the time division multiplexing mode and then transmits the signal in the space division multiplexing mode) is avoided, and the transmission quality of the signal is improved.
  • the lower-level IAB node can report the indication information of the unavailable TPMI in different duplex multiplexing modes to the upper-level IAB node, so as to avoid the situation when the lower-level IAB node is in the space division multiplexing mode or the full-duplex mode.
  • the upper-level IAB node schedules the lower-level IAB node to use the TPMI that causes strong interference.
  • the IAB node and the base station have different understandings of TPMI in different working modes.
  • the first information also includes indications of different working modes. information, so that the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes is unique.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first node Before transmitting the signal to the second node through MIMO, the first node first sends the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the network device. Then the network device sends a request signaling to the first node, requesting it to upload other MIMO parameters.
  • the first node reports one or more sets of MIMO parameters to the network device based on the content of the request command, and the network device configures a first resource set after receiving the MIMO parameters, the first resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the network device configures a first resource set.
  • the device sends the first resource set to the first node.
  • the first node selects the corresponding SRS resource and precoding matrix, and uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node according to the configuration information and precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource.
  • FIG. 11 takes as an example that the first node is IAB node 1, the second node is IAB node 2, and the network device is a base station.
  • another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission process is as follows:
  • Step S1101 The IAB node 1 reports the second parameter to the base station.
  • the second parameter is the MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode
  • the second parameter is the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode
  • the first The working mode is time division multiplexing mode.
  • Step S1102 The base station receives the second parameter sent by the IAB node 1, and sends the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
  • the base station After receiving the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time-division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will send the first request signaling to the IAB node 1, and the first request signaling is used for the IAB node 1 to report the time division multiplexing mode.
  • One or more sets of MIMO parameters other than the multiplexing mode After the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, there are the following three processing methods:
  • the base station configures a set of first reference signal resources for it according to the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, where the set of first reference signal resources is time division multiplexed
  • the SRS resource set corresponding to the mode, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the base station, and the base station sends the configured SRS resource and the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
  • the base station after receiving the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station configures the set of first reference signal resources corresponding to the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode, Send the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
  • the base station after receiving the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station sends the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
  • Step S1103 The IAB node 1 reports the third parameter to the base station according to the first request signaling.
  • the IAB node 1 is required to report a third parameter, where the third parameter includes one or more sets of MIMO parameters other than the time division multiplexing mode.
  • the IAB node 1 reports the third parameter to the base station according to the first request signaling, refer to step S1001, which is not repeated here.
  • Step S1104 The base station receives the third parameter, configures the reference signal resource, sends the configured reference signal resource to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the reference signal resource and the information of the second parameter and the third parameter to the IAB node 2. information.
  • the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After reporting the third parameter through the first request signaling, configure the corresponding resource set for it, and send the configured resource set to the IAB node 1 .
  • the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signals, and the set of multiple reference signals is multiple SRS resource sets; wherein, the multiple SRS resource sets respectively correspond to different working modes in the third parameter MIMO parameters, and the functions of the reference signal resources in the one SRS resource set are the same, and the reference signal resources are SRS resources; or the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of the reference signal resources is SRS resource set, wherein the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to the MIMO under different working modes in the third parameter parameter.
  • the base station receives the IAB node 1 based on the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures a resource set for it.
  • the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signals, and the set of multiple reference signals is multiple SRS resource sets; wherein, the multiple SRS resource sets respectively correspond to different working modes in the third parameter MIMO parameters, and the functions of the reference signal resources in the one SRS resource set are the same, and the reference signal resources are SRS resources; or the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of the reference signal resources is SRS resource set, wherein the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to the MIMO under different working modes in the third parameter parameter. Then, the base station sends its configured resource set and the first reference signal resource set to the IAB node 1 .
  • the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures the resource set according to the arithmetic third parameter, and sends the configured resource set to the IAB node 1 .
  • the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures the resource set according to the third parameter, configures the first reference signal resource set according to the second parameter, and sends the configured resource set and the first reference signal resource set to the IAB node 1.
  • Steps S1105 to S1109 refer to steps S1003 to S1007 respectively, which will not be repeated here.
  • This embodiment provides another way for the IAB node to report the MIMO parameters to the base station, that is: the IAB node reports the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode to the base station, and after the base station receives the reported MIMO parameters, the base station sends the first MIMO parameter to the IAB node.
  • a request signaling is used to instruct the IAB node to send one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode, and then configure corresponding SRS resources.
  • the base station configures the SRS resources of the MIMO parameters required to be reported in the first request signaling, which avoids waste of SRS resources to a certain extent.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of another MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first node Before the first node transmits signals to the second node through MIMO, it first reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, and the network device obtains the first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters received.
  • the first node calculates the precoding matrix of the current working mode according to the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node. Then, the first node transmits the uplink signal to the second node through MIMO according to the calculated precoding matrix and the configuration information in the reference signal resource selected according to the second indication information and the second state information.
  • Figure 12 takes the first node as IAB node 1, the second node as IAB node 2, and the network device as a base station as an example, as shown in Figure 12, another MIMO-based non-codebook-based uplink transmission process is as follows :
  • Step S1201 The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
  • step S1001 the process and operation of the IAB node 1 reporting multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station are similar to step S1001, please refer to step S1001, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step S1202 The base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1; The information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
  • the base station After the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters sent by the MT of IAB node 1, no matter whether the relationship between the MIMO parameters and different working modes is implicit or explicit, the base station, according to the information in the MIMO parameters, Configure the first resource set.
  • the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is a set of SRS resource set Set, each of the multiple SRS resource sets corresponds to different MIMO parameters corresponding to the different working modes respectively, and the multiple SRS resource sets are configured by the base station and correspond to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively.
  • SRS resources For example, if the MT of IAB node 1 reports MIMO parameters that have an explicit or implicit relationship with the full-duplex mode, time-division multiplexing mode, and space-division multiplexing mode, the base station will configure the SRS resources of these three different working modes respectively.
  • the base station also uses the SRS resource set or SRS resource as a unit to configure a corresponding channel state reference signal for it, and the channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the base station When the base station configures multiple SRS resource sets, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource set. There are three main ways to configure the identifier. For example, a new field ⁇ SDM ⁇ is added in the SRS resource set to indicate that the SRS resource set corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the SRS resource set is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field.
  • the second method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node.
  • the protocol stipulates that the SRS resource set numbered 0 is the SRS resource set used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the IAB When the MT of the node 1 sends the indication information, it will send the third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, and the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the numbers of the SRS resource set; wherein, the third indication information It is generated according to the information that the numbers correspond to different working modes sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 .
  • the MT of IAB node 1 when the MT of IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource set, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource set corresponds to through the identifier in it; through the third method above, the base station The SRS resource set is only numbered to distinguish the SRS resource set.
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured multiple SRS resource sets, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the multiple SRS resource sets, the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, and the configured
  • the CSI-RS signal is sent to the IAB node 2.
  • the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is an SRS resource set.
  • the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes and the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively correspond
  • the multiple SRS resources are the SRS resources configured by the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively.
  • Each SRS resource can only be configured with one port, and multiple SRS resources correspond to different working modes. Among them, one or more SRS resources are allowed to correspond to a working mode.
  • the base station also configures corresponding CSI-RS signals according to different working modes.
  • the base station When the base station configures multiple SRS resources, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource. There are mainly three ways to configure the identifier.
  • the first method is that the base station explicitly configures the relationship between the SRS resource and different working modes. For example, a new field ⁇ SDM ⁇ is added in the SRS resource to indicate that the SRS resource corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the function of the SRS resource is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field;
  • the second The method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resources (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node, for example: the protocol specifies the number
  • the SRS resource of 0 is the SRS resource used for TDM transmission;
  • the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the instruction information to the MT of
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set to IAB node 1, and sends the information of the first resource set, the information of multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by IAB node 1, and the configured CSI-RS signal to IAB node 2 .
  • the base station after receiving the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will not configure SRS resources for it immediately, only when the base station receives the SRS resource configuration request message sent by the IAB node 1 After the command, the base station configures SRS resources for it.
  • this embodiment illustrates the SRS resource configuration request signaling as an example.
  • the IAB node 1 sends five sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. If the IAB node 1 needs the base station to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters, the IAB node 1 sends the SRS resource configuration request signaling to the base station.
  • the resource configuration request signaling includes a request to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters. After receiving the SRS resource configuration request signaling, the base station will configure the first four correspondingly according to the content of the SRS resource configuration request signaling. SRS resource set of MIMO parameters. At the same time, the base station also uses the SRS resource set as a unit to configure the corresponding CSI-RS signal for it. For the process of configuring the SRS resource set, refer to the configuration process of the SRS resource set in the first possible implementation manner in step S1202, which will not be repeated here.
  • the base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured SRS resource set, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the SRS resource set, the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by the IAB node 1, and the configured CSI-RS signal to the IAB node 1.
  • the SRS resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources may correspond to different working modes. For example, there are three SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and these three SRS resources correspond to the three working modes of full duplex, time division and space division respectively. In addition, there are also situations where multiple SRS resources correspond to one working mode. For example, there are 5 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, three of which correspond to the space division working mode, and the other two correspond to time division and full Duplex working mode; only one port can be configured for each SRS resource.
  • Step S1203 The IAB node 2 sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the IAB node 1.
  • the IAB node 2 sends second indication information to the IAB node 1, where the second indication information is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2; wherein, the second indication information includes one or more SRIs , used to instruct IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resouce.
  • the IAB node 2 sends the first channel state reference signal corresponding to the working mode of the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 1 according to the working mode of the IAB node 1, and the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal, Used for IAB node 1 to estimate the downlink channel.
  • Step S1204 The IAB node 1 estimates the downlink channel based on the first channel state reference signal, obtains the downlink channel information, determines the uplink channel information according to the downlink channel information, and obtains the uplink channel matrix.
  • the IAB node 1 performs arithmetic processing on the uplink channel matrix to obtain a precoding matrix.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the second reference signal resource according to the second indication information and the second state information, and sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the second reference signal resource.
  • the IAB node 1 receives the first state reference signal, and the first state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1.
  • the IAB node 1 After the IAB node 1 receives the CSI-RS signal, it is based on The CSI-RS signal obtains the information of the uplink channel, and obtains a channel matrix of the uplink channel according to the obtained information of the uplink channel, and the specific process is: if the IAB node 2 sends the CSI- RS signal, IAB node 1 has four ports BP0 ⁇ BP4 to receive the CSI-RS signal, then a 4x4 downlink channel matrix can be obtained according to the transceiver port:
  • Each element in the above channel matrix represents the probability of signal transmission. Taking element h 12 as an example, h 12 represents the probability that port AP0 sends a signal and port BP1 receives a signal.
  • the IAB node 1 After obtaining the downlink channel matrix, the IAB node 1 can obtain the uplink channel matrix according to the obtained downlink channel matrix. It is assumed that the uplink channel matrix and the downlink channel matrix are in a transposed relationship, that is: Then the upstream channel matrix is:
  • IAB node 1 converts the uplink channel matrix After operation processing, such as eigenvalue decomposition (SVD decomposition), the weight of the SRS sent by IAB node 1 in the uplink is calculated, and the precoding matrix is obtained.
  • eigenvalue decomposition SVD decomposition
  • Each element in the above precoding matrix represents the weight when the IAB node 1 transmits the SRS signal in the uplink.
  • element d 12 represents that if the port BP0 of the IAB node 1 sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 1, the IAB node The port AP1 of 2 receives the SRS signal, and the weight of the transmitted SRS signal is d 12 .
  • IAB node 1 After IAB node 1 receives the second indication information sent by IAB node 2, there are mainly the following four ways to select SRS resources:
  • the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources corresponding to the working modes. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing in the space division transmission mode, the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources in the space division multiplexing mode.
  • the IAB node 2 determines the SRS resource that should be used by the MT of the IAB node 1 according to the time domain resource configuration information of the DU and the MT of the IAB node 1 .
  • the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode it selects according to the resource configuration of its MT/DU and the information of the scheduling situation. For example, if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the full-duplex working mode The SRS resource corresponding to the duplex mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 2 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission, then , the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the
  • the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode is selected by defining constraints (without other indication or signaling). It can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the full-duplex mode; or, for the DU resources of IAB node 1 in the opposite transmission direction, IAB node 2 can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode. .
  • the IAB node 1 After selecting the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, the IAB node 1 will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the SRI in the second indication information, and the selection methods mainly include the following two methods:
  • the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding field according to the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information , and then send SRS signals with weights to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set from the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information SRS resource, and send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 based on the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 2 sends a fourth indication information to the IAB node 1, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the difference between the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set and the different working modes corresponding relationship.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the fourth indication information and the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set in the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information, and then according to the precoding
  • the configuration information in the matrix and the selected SRS resource respectively sends the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2.
  • IAB node 1 will send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 based on the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the SRS resource in the selected SRS resource set. For example, IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set corresponding to the time-division multiplexing mode. There are 4 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the ports configured for these 4 SRS resources are BP0 to BP3 respectively. SRS signals with weights will be sent to IAB node 2 through ports BP0 ⁇ BP3 respectively.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding field according to the second state information, and according to the second indication information In the SRS resource of the selected corresponding field, select the corresponding SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and precoding in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the number according to the SRS resource corresponding to the second state information, and according to the SRI in the second indication information. In the resource, select the corresponding SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • the IAB node 2 sends the fourth indication information to the IAB node 1, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set is the same as the number of the SRS resource set. Correspondence between different working modes.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the fourth indication information and the second state information, and selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the SRI in the second indication information (the same working mode may correspond to multiple Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource), and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
  • one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port and the configured port numbers are different.
  • IAB node 1 will send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 according to the information of each selected SRS resource and the calculated precoding matrix (for example, sending SRS signals through different ports).
  • Step S1205 The IAB node 1 reports the second information to the IAB node 2.
  • IAB node 1 after sending the SRS signal to IAB node 2 according to the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal, IAB node 1 will report second information to IAB node 2, where the second information is used to indicate the different work mode, SRI not available.
  • the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the IAB node 2 By sending the indication information of the unavailable SRI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set, regardless of the SRS resource indicated by the indication information of the SRI, in the To a certain extent, it also narrows the scope of IAB node 2 to find SRS resources.
  • the number of available ports is different, and the SRS resource indicated by SRI is also different for different port numbers.
  • the space division multiplexing mode of an IAB node is compared with the time division multiplexing mode, the number of available ports is different, and the understanding of the same SRI is also different.
  • the first information also includes indication information of different working modes, so that the indication information of SRIs that are unavailable in the different working modes indicates SRS resource is unique.
  • Step S1206 the IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal based on the information of the second reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
  • the IAB node 2 receives the second reference signal sent by the IAB node 1, and the second reference signal is a multi-channel SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, which is used to estimate the uplink channel and obtain the information of the uplink channel. According to the The information of the uplink channel and multiple sets of MIMO parameters select the DMRS port and SRS resource of IAB node 1. The IAB node 2 places the information such as the DMRS port indicator corresponding to the DMRS port and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
  • Step S1207 IAB node 1 transmits a signal to IAB node 2 using MIMO based on the DCI signal and the precoding matrix.
  • the IAB node 1 After receiving the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource and port according to the SRI and DMRS port indicator in the DCI signal, and uses the port to transmit the signal to the IAB node 2. Then, according to the precoding matrix, the IAB node 1 assigns the weight of the uplink signal to be sent to the selected port, and sends the signal to the IAB node 2, thus realizing the use of MIMO uplink transmission of the signal with the weight.
  • the subordinate node sends multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station before transmitting the uplink signal to the superior node (IAB node 2) using MIMO, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes.
  • the base station configures multiple sets of SRS resources, and the SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes.
  • the base station sends the SRS resource to the lower node, and sends the information of the SRS resource and the information of the MIMO parameter to the upper node.
  • the upper-level node sends a scheduling instruction to the lower-level node, and the lower-level node calculates the precoding matrix according to the CSI-RS signal in the scheduling instruction, and then selects the SRS resource in the SRS resource corresponding to its current working mode according to the SRI in the instruction information, and according to The configuration information in the selected SRS resource sends an SRS signal to the upper node.
  • the lower node After sending the signal to the upper node, the lower node sends the unavailable SRI corresponding to the current working mode to the upper node.
  • the upper-level node estimates the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the lower-level node, obtains the information of the uplink channel, sends the DCI signal to the lower-level node based on the information of the uplink channel, SRS resources and MIMO parameters, and the downlink node selects the port and the lower-level node according to the information in the DCI signal.
  • SRS resource and based on the configuration information and precoding matrix in the SRS resource, use MIMO to transmit signals to the upper node.
  • the lower-level IAB node can report the unavailable SRIs in different working modes to the upper-level IAB node, so as to avoid the upper-level IAB node scheduling the lower-level IAB node when the lower-level IAB node is in the space division multiplexing mode or the full-duplex mode.
  • IAB nodes use SRS resources that cause strong interference.
  • IAB nodes and base stations have different understandings of SRI in different working modes.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a MIMO uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a method for a first node to perform uplink transmission using MIMO provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the upper node of the first node is a network device.
  • Figure 13 takes the first node as the IAB node 1 and the network device as the base station as an example.
  • the IAB node 1 uses MIMO to perform uplink transmission to the base station as follows:
  • Step S1301 The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
  • the IAB node 1 before using MIMO to transmit signals to the base station, the IAB node 1 needs to report multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station, so that the base station can configure the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by it. Corresponding SRS resource.
  • Step S1302 The base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1; The information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
  • the base station configures the first resource set according to the MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 .
  • the process of configuring the first resource set by the base station please refer to step S1002, which will not be repeated here.
  • the base station configures the first resource set according to the MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 .
  • the process of configuring the first resource set by the base station please refer to step S1202, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step S1303 The base station sends indication information to the IAB node 1.
  • the base station sends the first indication information to the IAB node 1, which is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the base station;
  • An indication message includes one or more SRIs, and is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resouce to send the SRS signal.
  • the base station sends second indication information to the IAB node 1, where the second indication information includes one or more Each SRI and the base station send a first channel state reference signal corresponding to the working mode of the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 1 according to the working mode of the IAB node 1, where the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the SRI is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resource to send the SRS signal to the base station;
  • the CSI-RS signal is used for the IAB node 1 to estimate the downlink channel.
  • Step S1304 The IAB node 1 sends a reference signal to the base station according to the indication information.
  • the reference signal is the first reference signal
  • the indication information received by the IAB node 1 from the base station is the first indication information
  • the base station receives the first indication information.
  • select the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information of the IAB node 1 select the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resources according to the SRI in the first indication information, and select the corresponding SRS resource according to the selected SRS resource.
  • the configuration information in the SRS resource sends an SRS signal to the base station.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first indication information, and then sends the SRS signal to the base station according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. Please refer to step S1004, here is not Repeat.
  • the reference signal is the second reference signal
  • the indication information received by the IAB node 1 from the base station is: For the second indication information, after receiving the second indication information, the base station estimates the downlink channel according to the CSI-RS signal in the indication information to obtain downlink channel information, and determines the uplink channel information according to the downlink channel information to obtain the uplink channel matrix.
  • the IAB node 1 performs arithmetic processing on the uplink channel matrix to obtain a precoding matrix.
  • the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the second indication information, and then sends to the base station according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource SRS signal with weights.
  • the IAB node 1 calculates the precoding matrix and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resources according to the second indication information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the precoding matrix and the selected SRS resource.
  • the configuration information in the SRS resource sends the SRS signal with the weight to the base station, please refer to step S1024, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step S1305 The IAB node 1 reports information to the base station.
  • the information reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station is the first information, and the first information is used to indicate that in the different working modes, Unavailable TPMI.
  • the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the precoding matrix indicated by the first indication information may cause strong interference to the uplink signal transmitted by the IAB node 1 in the current working mode to the base station.
  • the base station By sending the indication information of the unavailable TPMI to the base station for reference, that is, the base station selects the precoding matrix from the codebook without considering the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the TPMI, which reduces the size of the base station to a certain extent. Find the range of the precoding matrix.
  • the base station For the related introduction of the first information, please refer to step S1005, which will not be repeated here.
  • the information reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station is second information, and the second information is used to indicate SRIs that are not available in the different working modes.
  • the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the configuration information in the SRS resource indicated by the unavailable SRI will cause problems such as strong interference when transmitting the uplink signal to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB node 2 By sending the indication information of the unavailable SRI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set, regardless of the SRS resource indicated by the indication information of the SRI, in the To a certain extent, it also narrows the scope of IAB node 2 to find SRS resources.
  • the related introduction of the second information please refer to step S1205, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step S1306 the base station generates a DCI signal according to the information of the reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
  • the base station after receiving the SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, the base station estimates the uplink channel through the SRS signal, and obtains the information of the uplink channel. After the base station configures the SRS resources, it sends the information of the configured SRS resources and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station. suitable precoding matrix. If in step S1003, there are multiple SRIs in the indication information sent by the base station, the base station selects the most suitable SRS resource for the IAB node 1. Then the base station puts information such as the TPMI corresponding to the selected precoding matrix and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
  • the base station receives the multi-channel SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, which is used to estimate the uplink channel and obtain the uplink Channel information, select the DMRS port and SRS resource of IAB node 1 according to the uplink channel information and multiple sets of MIMO parameters.
  • the base station places the information such as the DMRS port indicator corresponding to the DMRS port and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
  • Step S1307 The IAB node 1 transmits the signal to the base station uplink by using MIMO according to the DCI signal.
  • the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on the codebook
  • the IAB node 1 selects the current job of the IAB node 1 according to the SRI and TPMI in the DCI signal.
  • the weighted signal is transmitted to the base station through the selected port, which realizes the use of MIMO to transmit the signal to the base station.
  • step S1007 for the specific process of the IAB node 1 transmitting the signal to the base station.
  • the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner
  • the IAB node 1 receives the DCI signal
  • the Select the corresponding SRS resource and port.
  • the IAB node 1 assigns the weight of the uplink signal to be sent to the selected port, and sends the signal to the base station, thereby realizing the use of MIMO uplink transmission signal.
  • step S1207 For the specific process of the IAB node 1 transmitting the signal to the base station, please refer to step S1207, which will not be repeated here.
  • the IAB node 1 when the upper-level node of the IAB node 1 is a base station, similar to the embodiments in FIG. 10 and FIG. 12 , before using MIMO to transmit signals to the base station, the IAB node 1 must first report multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station. The multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes respectively. After receiving the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, the base station configures corresponding SRS resources. The IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the current working mode, and uses the selected SRS resource to transmit a signal to the base station by using MIMO. With the method described in this embodiment, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the current working mode, which effectively avoids problems such as strong interference and unavailability of some panels, and improves the signal transmission quality.
  • the IAB node reports its own hardware capability or status, including, for example, the number of available antennas in different modes, the number of antenna ports, the number of panels, and the relationship between antennas and/or panels.
  • the IAB MT reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode.
  • the base station determines the corresponding resource sets of the IAB node in different working modes according to the hardware capability or state reported by the IAB and the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode, which are used for MIMO transmission in different modes.
  • the method for determining/indicating reference signal resources used in different modes is similar to other embodiments of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 14 may be the first node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 14 It may include a reporting unit 1401 and a receiving unit 1402, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • a reporting unit 1401, configured to report MIMO parameters in different working modes to a network device
  • the receiving unit 1402 is configured to receive a first resource set sent by the network device, wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the device 14 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • a first indication information receiving unit configured to receive the first indication information sent by the second node after the receiving unit receives the first resource set sent by the network device;
  • a first reference signal resource calling unit configured to use the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information
  • a first reference signal sending unit configured to send a first reference signal to the second node
  • the first information reporting unit is configured to report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the first reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
  • a first reference signal resource selection unit configured to select a first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the first state information.
  • the device 14 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • a second indication information receiving unit configured to receive the second indication information sent by the second node
  • a first channel state reference signal receiving unit configured to receive the first channel state reference signal
  • a first channel state reference signal calling unit configured to use the first channel state reference signal
  • a second reference signal resource calling unit configured to use the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information
  • the second information reporting unit is configured to report the second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the second reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
  • the second reference signal resource selection unit is configured to select the first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
  • each unit in the transmission parameter determining apparatus 14 may also correspond to the execution steps of the first node in the embodiment of the transmission parameter determining method, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 15 may be the network equipment in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 15 may be It includes a receiving unit 1501, a resource configuration unit 1502 and a sending unit 1503, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • a receiving unit 1501 configured to receive the MIMO parameters reported by the first node under different working modes
  • a resource configuration unit 1502 configured to configure a first resource set
  • the sending unit 1503 is configured to send the first resource set to the first node, wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the resource configuration unit 1502 further includes:
  • an identification configuration unit configured to respectively configure corresponding identifications for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources;
  • the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources
  • corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
  • the device 15 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
  • An information sending unit configured to send the information of the first resource set to the second node after the resource configuration unit configures the first resource set.
  • each unit in the transmission parameter determining apparatus 15 may also correspond to the execution steps of the network device in the embodiment of the transmission parameter determining method, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 may be the second node in the above method embodiments.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 It may include a first indication information sending unit 1601, a first reference signal receiving unit 1602 and a first information receiving unit 1603, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • a first indication information sending unit 1601, configured to send the first indication information to the first node
  • a first reference signal receiving unit 1602 configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information
  • the first information receiving unit 1603 is configured to receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 It may include a second indication information sending unit 1701, a first channel state reference signal sending unit 1702, a second reference signal receiving unit 1703 and a second information receiving unit 1704, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • the second indication information sending unit 1701 is configured to send the second indication information to the first node
  • a first channel state reference signal sending unit 1702 configured to send a first channel state reference signal to the first node
  • the second reference signal receiving unit 1703 is configured to receive, based on the second indication information, the first channel state reference signal sent by the first node using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resources in the first resource set. Two reference signals;
  • the second information receiving unit 1704 is configured to receive the second information reported by the first node, wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters may be the first node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 18 may be It includes a memory 1801, a communication module 1802 and a processor 1803, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • the memory 1801 is used to store program codes.
  • the communication module 1802 is used to perform the following steps:
  • a first resource set sent by the network device is received; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after receiving the first resource set configured by the network device, further include:
  • the first indication information sent by the second node is received.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after the processor 1803 uses the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information, send a message to the second node A first reference signal is sent.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after sending the first reference signal to the second node, report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used for Indicates the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after receiving the first resource set configured by the network device, further include:
  • the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node are received.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: use the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal in the first resource set in the processor 1803 based on the second indication information After the resource, a second reference signal is sent to the second node.
  • the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after sending the second reference signal to the second node, report second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used for Indicates the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
  • the processor 1803 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
  • the first reference signal resource in the first resource set is used based on the first indication information.
  • the processor 1802 is further configured to: after the communication module 1802 receives the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node, based on the second indication information, Using the first channel state reference signal and second reference signal resources in the first resource set.
  • each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 18 may also correspond to the execution steps of the first node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters may be a network device in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 19 may include a memory 1901. , the communication module 1902 and the processor 1903, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • the memory 1901 is used to store program codes.
  • the communication module 1902 is used to perform the following steps:
  • the communication module 1902 is further configured to: after the processor 1903 configures the first resource set, send the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource A set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different operating modes respectively.
  • the communication module 1902 is further configured to: after the processor 1903 configures the first resource set, send the information of the first resource set to the second node.
  • the processor 1903 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
  • the first resource set is configured.
  • configuring the first resource set by the processor 1903 further includes: if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, a set of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set Sets are configured with corresponding identifiers respectively;
  • the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources
  • corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
  • each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 19 may also correspond to the execution steps of the network equipment in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 20 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 20 may include a memory 2001. , the communication module 2002 and the processor 2003, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • the memory 2001 is used to store program codes.
  • the communication module 2002 is used to perform the following steps:
  • the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after receiving the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, send the first indication information to the first node.
  • the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after sending the first indication information to the first node, receive the first reference signal sent by the first node.
  • the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after receiving the first reference signal, receive first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the different TPMI not available in work mode.
  • the processor 2003 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
  • the communication module 2002 After the communication module 2002 receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, it generates first indication information.
  • each unit in the apparatus 20 for determining transmission parameters may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may include a memory 2101. , the communication module 2102 and the processor 2103, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
  • the memory 2101 is used to store program codes.
  • the communication module 2102 is used to perform the following steps:
  • the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after receiving the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, send the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node.
  • the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after sending the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node, receive the second reference signal sent by the first node.
  • the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after receiving the second reference signal, receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the Unavailable TPMI in different working modes.
  • the processor 2103 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
  • second indication information is generated.
  • each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, implements the network in the foregoing embodiment and various possible implementation manners thereof Data measurement methods.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program, the computer program includes instructions, when the computer program is executed by a computer, so that the network device of the collection point can execute the network device of the collection point in the above embodiment and its various possible implementation manners
  • the executed process, or the second network device can execute the process executed by the second network device in the foregoing embodiment and its various possible implementations, so that the server can execute the server in the foregoing embodiment and its various possible implementations. the process performed.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a network device of a collection point to implement the functions involved in the methods in the foregoing embodiments and various possible manners, or a second network device to implement the foregoing
  • the functions involved in the methods in the embodiments and their various possible manners, or the server implements the functions involved in the methods in the above-mentioned embodiments and their various possible manners.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing necessary program instructions and data of the network device of the collection point or the second network device or the server.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the memory in the above-mentioned embodiments may be a read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or Other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, and can also be Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM ) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or capable of carrying or storing data in the form of instructions or data structures desired program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through a bus.
  • the memory can be integrated with the processor.
  • the processor in the above-mentioned embodiment may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the above program programs. circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the units described above as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may or may not be physical units, and may be located in one place or distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated units are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of software in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc., specifically a processor in the computer device) to execute all or part of the steps of the foregoing methods in various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium may include: U disk, mobile hard disk, magnetic disk, optical disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or random access memory (random access memory, RAM) and other various programs that can store program codes medium.

Abstract

A method for determining transmission parameters, comprising: a first node, before using MIMO to transmit signals to a second node, must first report MIMO parameters in different working modes to a network device. The first node is a subordinate node of the second node. The network device configures a first resource set on the basis of the MIMO parameters reported by the first node, and sends the first resource set to the first node and information of the first resource set and information of the MIMO parameters to the second node. The second node sends indication information to the first node; and the first node selects a reference signal resource on the basis of the indication information, and sends a reference signal to the second node on the basis of configuration information in the reference signal resource. The second node generates control information on the basis of the reference signal and the MIMO parameter information, and sends same to the first node; and the first node selects an SRS resource on the basis of the control information, and transmits signals to the second node on the basis of a pre-coding matrix and configuration information in the SRS resource.

Description

确定传输参数的方法及相关装置和设备、可读存储介质Method and related apparatus and device for determining transmission parameters, and readable storage medium 技术领域technical field
本发明涉及确定传输参数技术领域,尤其涉及一种确定传输参数方法及相关装置和设备、计算机可读存储介质。The present invention relates to the technical field of determining transmission parameters, and in particular, to a method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatuses and devices, and computer-readable storage media.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动通信技术的不断发展,频谱资源日趋紧张,为了提高频谱利用率,在移动通信中采用多进多出MIMO(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)技术来进行信号的收发,极大地提高了信道容量。MIMO系统是在发送端和接收端都使用多根天线,在收发之间构成多个信道的天线系统。MIMO技术是一种复杂的天线分集技术,多径效应会影响信号质量,MIMO系统利用多径效应来改善通信质量。在MIMO系统中,收发双方使用多副可以同时工作的天线进行通信,MIMO系统通常采用复杂的信号处理技术来显著增强可靠性、传输范围和吞吐量。发射机采用MIMO技术,同时发送多路射频信号,接收机再从这些信号中将数据恢复出来。With the continuous development of mobile communication technology, spectrum resources are becoming increasingly scarce. In order to improve spectrum utilization, MIMO (multiple input multiple output, MIMO) technology is used in mobile communication to transmit and receive signals, which greatly improves the channel efficiency. capacity. A MIMO system is an antenna system in which multiple antennas are used at both the transmitting end and the receiving end, and multiple channels are formed between transmitting and receiving. MIMO technology is a complex antenna diversity technology, and the multipath effect will affect the signal quality. The MIMO system uses the multipath effect to improve the communication quality. In a MIMO system, the transmitter and the receiver use multiple antennas that can work at the same time to communicate. MIMO systems usually use complex signal processing techniques to significantly enhance reliability, transmission range, and throughput. The transmitter uses MIMO technology to transmit multiple RF signals at the same time, and the receiver recovers the data from these signals.
目前,在5G NR中,采用MIMO技术进行上行链路发送数据的方式主要有两种:一种方式是MIMO基于码本(codebook)的上行链路的传输,在协议中定义了多种码本,可以支持各种硬件条件的终端进行各种场景的上行传输。另外一种方式是MIMO基于非码本(Non-codebook)的上行链路的传输,终端不再依据协议定义的码本进行上行传输,而是依据相关的信道状态参考信号CSI-RS(Channel State Information-Reference Signal,CIS-RS)自行调整上行信道的权值,上行传输信号。At present, in 5G NR, there are two main ways to use MIMO technology to transmit data in the uplink: one is the MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission, and a variety of codebooks are defined in the protocol. , which can support terminals with various hardware conditions to perform uplink transmission in various scenarios. Another way is that MIMO is based on non-codebook (Non-codebook) uplink transmission. The terminal no longer performs uplink transmission according to the codebook defined by the protocol, but according to the relevant channel state reference signal CSI-RS (Channel State Reference Signal). Information-Reference Signal, CIS-RS) adjusts the weight of the uplink channel by itself, and transmits the signal in the uplink.
但是,不管是基于码本的上行链路的传输方式,还是基于非码本的上行链路的传输方式,由于接入链路和回传链路可能使用的是重叠的时间与频率资源。如果IAB中继节点的MT发送的信号,通过泄露或反射进入到IAB中继节点的DU的接收机,会对IAB DU接收正常上行信号造成严重干扰。此外,全双工和空分复用的工作模式会对MIMO传输产生限制,例如部分port和面板不可用,现有协议的上行MIMO传输方案无法支持IAB MT在多种传输模式下的上行传输。However, regardless of whether it is a codebook-based uplink transmission method or a non-codebook-based uplink transmission method, since the access link and the backhaul link may use overlapping time and frequency resources. If the signal sent by the MT of the IAB relay node enters the receiver of the DU of the IAB relay node through leakage or reflection, it will cause serious interference to the normal uplink signal received by the IAB DU. In addition, the working modes of full duplex and space division multiplexing will limit MIMO transmission. For example, some ports and panels are unavailable, and the uplink MIMO transmission scheme of the existing protocol cannot support the uplink transmission of IAB MT in multiple transmission modes.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提出了一种确定传输参数的方法,解决了MIMO在基于空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生的自干扰,以及IAB中继节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的问题。The embodiment of the present application proposes a method for determining transmission parameters, which solves the self-interference caused by the IAB relay node and the hardware problems of the IAB relay node in the scenario of MIMO based on space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. MIMO transmission is limited.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数的方法,包括:In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
第一节点将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备;The first node reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device;
所述第一节点接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The first node receives a first resource set sent by the network device; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在本申请实施例中的工作模式可以包括时分复用模式、空分复用模式和全双工模式;其中全双工模式可选的,可以进一步分为上行全双工和下行全双工。第一节点指的是移动通信网中的中继节点,可以称为节点、中继节点、IAB node、IAB节点、IAB中继节点等;所述网络设备指的是基站等能够实现有线通信网络与无线终端之间的无线信号传输的设备。The working modes in the embodiments of the present application may include a time division multiplexing mode, a space division multiplexing mode, and a full-duplex mode; the full-duplex mode is optional, and may be further divided into uplink full-duplex and downlink full-duplex. The first node refers to a relay node in the mobile communication network, which can be called a node, a relay node, an IAB node, an IAB node, an IAB relay node, etc.; the network equipment refers to a base station and the like that can implement a wired communication network. A device for wireless signal transmission with wireless terminals.
本申请实施例,第一节点在使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号之前要先向网络设备上报多套MIMO参数,上报的多套MIMO参数对应的是不同的工作模式,网络设备根据上报的多套MIMO参数配置相应的SRS资源以便第一节点在使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号时,可以选择对应的SRS资源,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB节点产生自干扰,以及IAB中继节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。其中,第二节点是第一节点的上级节点。In this embodiment of the present application, the first node needs to report multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device before using MIMO to transmit signals to the second node. The multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported correspond to different working modes. The MIMO parameters configure the corresponding SRS resources so that the first node can select the corresponding SRS resources when using MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that the IAB node is generated from the Interference, as well as IAB relay node equipment hardware problems lead to technical problems that limit MIMO transmission. Wherein, the second node is an upper-level node of the first node.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数包括:In a possible implementation manner, the MIMO parameters in the different working modes include:
所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板的数量。The number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,端口指的是antenna port,简称port,是逻辑端口。MIMO参数包括可用port的数量、可用port之间的关系以及可用面板的数量,通过上述三个信息可以显性或隐性地指示MIMO参数对应的工作模式。In this embodiment of the present application, a port refers to an antenna port, or port for short, which is a logical port. The MIMO parameters include the number of available ports, the relationship between the available ports, and the number of available panels. The above three pieces of information can explicitly or implicitly indicate the working mode corresponding to the MIMO parameters.
本申请实施例,第一节点向网络设备上报多套MIMO参数,上报的多套MIMO参数对应不同的工作模式。网络设备根据上报的多套MIMO参数配置多套SRS资源。根据显式的指示或者预定义的规则,第一节点使用与其所处的工作模式相对应的SRS资源,根据所选的SRS资源中的配置信息,使用MIMO上行传输信号。通过这种方式向网络设备上报多套MIMO参数的这种方式,有利于网络设备配置相应的SRS资源,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the first node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes. The network device configures multiple sets of SRS resources according to the multiple sets of reported MIMO parameters. According to an explicit instruction or a predefined rule, the first node uses the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode in which the first node is located, and uses the MIMO uplink transmission signal according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. In this way, multiple sets of MIMO parameters are reported to the network device, which is beneficial for the network device to configure the corresponding SRS resources, thereby solving the problem that the first node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. , and the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited due to the hardware problem of the first node device.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述多个参考信号资源的集合与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;其中,每个参考信号资源的集合包括多个参考信号资源,同一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源功能相同;或者In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the sets of multiple reference signal resources respectively correspond to MIMO parameters in the different working modes; wherein each The set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合包括多种类型的参考信号资源,所述多种类型的参考信号资源分别与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数对应;其中,每种类型的参考信号资源包括一个或多个参考信号资源。The first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding; wherein, each type of reference signal resources includes one or more reference signal resources.
本申请实施例,所述第一资源集指的是网络设备为IAB节点配置的SRS资源的集合,网络设备配置的SRS资源分为两种类型:一种是第一资源集为多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set为网络设备配置的SRS资源,每个SRS resource set中有一个或多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource set,有利于第一节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource set中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the first resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the IAB node. The SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is that the first resource set is a plurality of reference signals. The set of resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the multiple SRS resource sets are the SRS resources configured by the network equipment, and each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources, so The reference signal resource mentioned above refers to the SRS resource. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set. The second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the MIMO transmission is restricted due to hardware problems of the first node.
另一种是SRS资源指的是一个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set中包含多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是 SRS resource,一个或多个SRS resource对应同一种工作模式,所述一个或多个SRS resource为网络设备配置的SRS资源。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource(一种工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The other is that the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, and the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource, one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode, and the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device. The network equipment is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource in the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources). , and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thus solving the problem of self-interference caused by the IAB relay node in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causing MIMO transmission. Restricted technical issues.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, after the first node receives the first resource set configured by the network device, the method further includes:
所述第一节点接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息;receiving, by the first node, the first indication information sent by the second node;
所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号;sending, by the first node, a first reference signal to the second node by using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
所述第一节点向所述第二节点上报第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI;The first node reports first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。Wherein, the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
在本申请实施例中,所述第一指示信息可以为第二节点向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向第二节点发送SRS信号;所述第一参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号可以为第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may be scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, which is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node; A reference signal resource is an SRS resource selected according to scheduling signaling; the first reference signal may be an SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node.
本申请实施例,第二节点向第一节点发送调度信令,用于指示第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号,当第一节点是基于码本的方式向第二节点传输信号时,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向第二节点发送不可用的TPMI,TPMI的作用是用来指示预编码矩阵的。第一节点通过向第二节点发送不可用的TPMI,在第二节点从码本中选择预编码矩阵时提供参考,以便第二节点在选择预编码矩阵时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的预编码矩阵。In this embodiment of the present application, the second node sends scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used to instruct the first node to send an SRS signal to the second node. When the first node transmits a signal to the second node based on a codebook, After sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable TPMI to the second node, and the function of the TPMI is to indicate the precoding matrix. The first node provides a reference when the second node selects the precoding matrix from the codebook by sending the unavailable TPMI to the second node, so that the second node selects the precoding matrix to avoid those when using MIMO transmission for the first node. , a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息;In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,第一指示信息包括不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息。对于同一个TPMI,在不同的工作模式对应的码本中所指示的预编码矩阵可能不同,所述不同工作模式的指示信息用于指明第一节点所发送的TPMI对应的何种工作模式所对应的码本,避免了一个TPMI指示多个码本中的预编码矩阵的情况。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes. For the same TPMI, the precoding matrices indicated in the codebooks corresponding to different working modes may be different, and the indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate which working mode corresponds to the TPMI sent by the first node. codebook, avoiding the situation where one TPMI indicates precoding matrices in multiple codebooks.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源包括:In a possible implementation manner, the using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set includes:
根据第一状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。The first reference signal resource in the first resource set is selected according to the first state information.
本申请实施例,第一节点接收到第二节点的第一指示信息后,所述第一指示信息包含一个或多个SRI,所述一个或多个SRI用于指示第一节点从第一资源集中选择对应的SRS  resource。第一节点会根据第一状态信息来选择对应的SRS资源,并根据所述第一指示信息从所选的SRS资源中选择相应的SRS resource,再根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点发送SRS信号。所述第一状态信息隐性或显性地指示了第一节点当前所处的工作模式,因此,第一节点根据所述第一状态信息选择的SRS resource为第一节点当前所处的工作模式对应的SRS resource。第一节点通过所述第一状态信息选择第一参考信号资源的方式,使得第一节点选择其对应工作模式下的SRS resource,能够有效避免在向第二节点传输信号的过程中的强干扰等问题。In this embodiment of the present application, after the first node receives the first indication information of the second node, the first indication information includes one or more SRIs, and the one or more SRIs are used to instruct the first node to use the first resource Select the corresponding SRS resource centrally. The first node will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and select the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the first indication information, and then send the SRS resource to the first node according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. Two nodes send SRS signals. The first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node. Therefore, the SRS resource selected by the first node according to the first state information is the current working mode of the first node. The corresponding SRS resource. The first node selects the first reference signal resource through the first state information, so that the first node selects the SRS resource in its corresponding working mode, which can effectively avoid strong interference in the process of transmitting signals to the second node, etc. question.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一状态信息为:In a possible implementation manner, the first state information is:
所述第一节点的不同工作模式对应的上行定时信息;或者Uplink timing information corresponding to different working modes of the first node; or
所述第一节点的DU功能模块和MT功能模块的时频资源、调度信息。Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
本申请实施例,所述第一状态信息隐性或显性地指示了第一节点当前所处的工作模式,使得第一节点选择对应工作模式的SRS资源,避免了一个SRI指示多个SRS resource的情况。In this embodiment of the present application, the first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node, so that the first node selects the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode, avoiding that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources Case.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, after the first node receives the first resource set configured by the network device, the method further includes:
所述第一节点接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号;receiving, by the first node, the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node;
所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,向所述第二节点发送第二参考信号;The first node sends a second reference signal to the second node by using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
所述第一节点向所述第二节点上报第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI;The first node reports second information to the second node; wherein, the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。Wherein, the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
本申请实施例,所述第二指示信息可以为第二节点向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向第二节点发送SRS信号;所述第二参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号可以为第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号;所述第一信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the second indication information may be scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node; the second reference The signal resource is an SRS resource selected according to scheduling signaling; the first reference signal may be an SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node; the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal.
在本申请实施例中,第二节点向第一节点发送一个调度信令,用于让第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号,当第一节点是基于非码本的方式向第二节点传输信号时,第二节点除了会向第一节点发送一个调度信令之外,还会向第一节点发送CSI-RS信号,用于第一节点估计上行信道,从而得到一个预编码矩阵。此外,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向第二节点发送不可用的SRI,SRI的作用是用来指示SRS resource的。第一节点通过向第二节点发送不可用的SRI这种方式,在第二节点在选择SRS resource时提供参考,以便第二节点在选择SRS resource时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的SRS resource。In this embodiment of the present application, the second node sends a scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used for the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node. When the first node sends the SRS signal to the second node in a non-codebook based manner When transmitting a signal, in addition to sending a scheduling signaling to the first node, the second node also sends a CSI-RS signal to the first node, which is used by the first node to estimate the uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix. In addition, after sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the second node, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource. By sending the unavailable SRI to the second node, the first node provides a reference when the second node selects the SRS resource, so that the second node can avoid the possibility of using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource. SRS resource that brings problems such as strong interference.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息;In a possible implementation manner, the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,第二指示信息包括不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息。对于同一个SRI,如果SRS resource对应的工作模式不同,其指示的SRS resource可能也会有所不同。所述第二指示信息中的不同工作模式的指示信息用于指示第一节点所发送的SRI对应的是何种工作模式所对应的SRS resource,避免了一个SRI指示多个SRS resource的情况。In this embodiment of the present application, the second indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable SRIs in the different working modes. For the same SRI, if the working mode corresponding to the SRS resource is different, the indicated SRS resource may also be different. The indication information of different working modes in the second indication information is used to indicate the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode the SRI sent by the first node corresponds to, avoiding a situation where one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源包括:In a possible implementation manner, the using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set includes:
使用所述第一信道状态参考信号,以及根据第二状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源。using the first channel state reference signal, and selecting a second reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
本申请实施例,第一节点接收到第二节点的第二指示信息后,会根据第二状态信息来选择对应的SRS resource,并根据SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点发送SRS信号。所述第二状态信息隐性或显性地指示了第一节点当前所处的工作模式,因此,第一节点根据所述第二状态信息选择的SRS resource为第一节点当前所处的工作模式对应的SRS resource。第一节点通过所述第二状态信息选择第一参考信号资源的方式,使得第一节点选择其对应工作模式下的SRS resource,能够有效解决向第二节点传输信号的过程中的强干扰等问题。In this embodiment of the present application, after receiving the second indication information from the second node, the first node selects a corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, and sends an SRS signal to the second node according to the configuration information in the SRS resource. The second state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node. Therefore, the SRS resource selected by the first node according to the second state information is the current working mode of the first node. The corresponding SRS resource. The first node selects the first reference signal resource through the second state information, so that the first node selects the SRS resource under its corresponding working mode, which can effectively solve problems such as strong interference in the process of transmitting signals to the second node. .
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二状态信息为:In a possible implementation manner, the second state information is:
所述第一节点的不同工作模式对应的上行定时信息;或者Uplink timing information corresponding to different working modes of the first node; or
所述第一节点的DU功能模块和MT功能模块的时频资源、调度信息。Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
所述第一状态信息隐性或显性地指示了第一节点当前所处的工作模式,使得第一节点选择对应工作模式的SRS资源,避免了一个SRI指示多个SRS resource的情况。The first state information implicitly or explicitly indicates the current working mode of the first node, so that the first node selects the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode, avoiding the situation that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一节点将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first node reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, including:
所述第一节点向所述网络设备上报第二参数;其中,所述第二参数为所述第一节点在第一工作模式下的MIMO参数;reporting, by the first node, a second parameter to the network device; wherein, the second parameter is a MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode;
所述第一节点接收所述网络设备发送的第一请求信令;receiving, by the first node, the first request signaling sent by the network device;
所述第一节点基于所述第一请求信令向所述网络设备上报第三参数;其中,所述第三参数是所述第一节点在除所述第一工作模式以外的其他工作模式下的MIMO参数。The first node reports a third parameter to the network device based on the first request signaling; wherein, the third parameter is that the first node is in another working mode other than the first working mode MIMO parameters.
本申请实施例,所述第二参数可以为第一节点上报的、时分复用模式下的MIMO参数;所述第一工作模式为时分复用模式;所述第三参数可以为第一节点根据第一请求信令上报的MIMO参数;网络设备可以指的是基站等能够实现有线通信网络与无线终端之间的无线信号传输的设备。In this embodiment of the present application, the second parameter may be a MIMO parameter reported by the first node in a time-division multiplexing mode; the first working mode is a time-division multiplexing mode; the third parameter may be the first node according to The MIMO parameter reported by the first request signaling; the network device may refer to a device such as a base station that can implement wireless signal transmission between a wired communication network and a wireless terminal.
在本实施例中,第一节点向网络设备上报MIMO参数还有另外一种方式,即第一节点 先向网络设备上报一套MIMO参数,这套MIMO参数对应的是时分复用模式下的MIMO参数。然后,第一节点接收网络设备发送的请求信令,所述第一请求信令用于指示第一节点上报对应其它工作模式下的一套或多套MIMO参数。第一节点根据第一请求信令向网络设备发送MIMO参数,然后接收网络设备所配置的SRS资源。第一节点在使用MIMO向上级节点传输信号时,可以选择对应的SRS资源,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB节点产生自干扰,以及IAB中继节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment, there is another way for the first node to report the MIMO parameters to the network device, that is, the first node first reports a set of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the set of MIMO parameters corresponds to the MIMO in the time division multiplexing mode parameter. Then, the first node receives request signaling sent by the network device, where the first request signaling is used to instruct the first node to report one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to other working modes. The first node sends the MIMO parameter to the network device according to the first request signaling, and then receives the SRS resource configured by the network device. When the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the superior node, it can select the corresponding SRS resource, thus solving the problem of self-interference generated by the IAB node and the hardware of the IAB relay node in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. The problem causes a technical issue where MIMO transmission is limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first node receives the first resource set sent by the network device, including:
所述第一节点接收所述网络设备根据所述第二参数、配置第一参考信号资源的集合;其中,所述第一参考信号资源的集合包括多个功能相同的参考信号资源;receiving, by the first node, a set of first reference signal resources configured by the network device according to the second parameter; wherein, the set of first reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources with the same function;
所述第一节点向所述网络设备发送第一请求信令;sending, by the first node, a first request signaling to the network device;
所述第一节点接收所述网络设备根据所述第三参数配置的资源集。The first node receives the resource set configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
本申请实施例,所述第二参数为在时分复用模式下的第一节点的MIMO传输参数,所述第一参考信号资源的集合为与在时分复用模式下的第一节点的MIMO传输参数对应的SRS resource set;所述资源集为网络设备根据所述第三参数配置的SRS资源。网络设备配置资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the second parameter is the MIMO transmission parameter of the first node in the time division multiplexing mode, and the set of the first reference signal resources is the MIMO transmission with the first node in the time division multiplexing mode The SRS resource set corresponding to the parameter; the resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device according to the third parameter. The network device configuration resource set and the set of first reference signal resources are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby solving the problem of space division In the scenario of transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first node receives the first resource set sent by the network device, including:
所述第一节点向所述网络设备发送第一请求信令;sending, by the first node, a first request signaling to the network device;
所述第一节点接收所述网络设备根据所述第二参数、配置第一参考信号资源的集合和所述网络设备根据所述第三参数配置的资源集。The first node receives the set of first reference signal resources configured by the network device according to the second parameter and the resource set configured by the network device according to the third parameter.
网络设备配置资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The network device configuration resource set and the set of first reference signal resources are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby solving the problem of space division In the scenario of transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
所述网络设备向所述第一节点发送第一请求信令;sending, by the network device, first request signaling to the first node;
所述网络设备根据所述第三参数配置的资源集,并将所述资源集发送给所述第一节点。The network device configures the resource set according to the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
网络设备配置资源集,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The network device configures the resource set, which helps the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and uses the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thus solving the problem of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission. In the scenario, the IAB relay node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述资源集包括多个参考信号资源的集合;其中,所述多个参考信号资源的集合基于所述第三参数所配置的,且所述一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源,功能相同;或者In a possible implementation manner, the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signal resources; wherein, the set of multiple reference signal resources is configured based on the third parameter, and the one reference signal resource reference signal resources in the set of , with the same function; or
所述资源集包括一个参考信号资源的集合,其中所述参考信号资源的集合包括多个基于第三参数对应配置的参考信号资源。The resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, wherein the set of reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources correspondingly configured based on the third parameter.
本申请实施例,所述资源集指的是网络设备为第一节点配置的SRS资源的集合,网络设备配置的SRS资源分为两种类型:一种是资源集为多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set为网络设备配置的SRS资源,每个SRS resource set中有一个或多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource set,有利于第一节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource set中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the first node, and the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is the resource set that is the resources of multiple reference signals. Set, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device, and each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources refer to SRS resource. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set. The upper-level IAB node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the IAB relay node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
另一种是SRS资源指的是一个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set中包含多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource,对应同一种工作模式下的MIMO参数的一个或多个SRS resource为网络设备配置的SRS资源。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource(一种工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The other is that the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, and the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource, one or more SRS resources corresponding to MIMO parameters in the same working mode are SRS resources configured by the network device. The network equipment is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource in the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources). , and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thus solving the problem of self-interference caused by the IAB relay node in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causing MIMO transmission. Restricted technical issues.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数的方法,包括:In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
网络设备接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数;The network device receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node;
所述网络设备配置第一资源集,并将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The network device configures a first resource set, and sends the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
本申请实施例,网络设备接收到第一节点上报的多套MIMO参数后,为其配置相应的SRS资源,这样,第一节点在使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号时,可以选择对应的SRS资源,有效避免强干扰等问题。所述网络设备指的是基站等能够实现有线通信网络与无线终端之间的无线信号传输的设备。In this embodiment of the present application, after receiving multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the first node, the network device configures corresponding SRS resources for it. In this way, when the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, it can select the corresponding SRS resources. , to effectively avoid problems such as strong interference. The network device refers to a device such as a base station that can realize wireless signal transmission between a wired communication network and a wireless terminal.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数包括:In a possible implementation manner, the MIMO parameters in the different working modes include:
所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板的数量。The number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,端口指的是antenna port,简称port,是逻辑端口。MIMO参数包括可用port的数量、可用port之间的关系以及可用面板的数量,通过上述三个信息可以显性或隐性地体现MIMO参数对应的工作模式。In this embodiment of the present application, a port refers to an antenna port, or port for short, which is a logical port. The MIMO parameters include the number of available ports, the relationship between the available ports, and the number of available panels, and the working mode corresponding to the MIMO parameters can be explicitly or implicitly reflected through the above three pieces of information.
本申请实施例,第一节点向网络设备上报多套MIMO参数,上报的多套MIMO参数对应不同的工作模式。网络设备根据上报的多套MIMO参数配置多套SRS资源。根据显式的指示或者预定义的规则,第一节点使用相应的不同工作模式的SRS资源的配置,使用MIMO上行传输信号。通过这种方式,有利于网络设备配置相应的SRS资源,第一节点在向第二节点传输信号时可以使用与其所处工作模式向适应的SRS资源,并利用所选的SRS资源中配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the first node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the network device, and the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes. The network device configures multiple sets of SRS resources according to the multiple sets of reported MIMO parameters. According to an explicit instruction or a predefined rule, the first node uses the corresponding configuration of SRS resources in different working modes, and uses MIMO uplink transmission signals. In this way, it is beneficial for the network device to configure the corresponding SRS resources. When transmitting signals to the second node, the first node can use the SRS resources adapted to the working mode in which it is located, and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resources to The second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述多个参考信号资源的集合与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;其中,每个参考信号资源的集合包括多个参考信号资源,同一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源功能相同;或者In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the sets of multiple reference signal resources respectively correspond to MIMO parameters in the different working modes; wherein each The set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合包括多种类型的参考信号资源,所述多种类型的参考信号资源分别与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;每种类型的参考信号资源包括一个或多个参考信号资源。The first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding respectively; each type of reference signal resource includes one or more reference signal resources.
本申请实施例,所述第一资源集指的是网络设备为IAB节点配置的SRS资源的集合,网络设备配置的SRS资源分为两种类型:一种是第一资源集为多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set为SRS资源,每个SRS resource set中有一个或多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource set,有利于第一节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource set中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the first resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the IAB node. The SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is that the first resource set is a plurality of reference signals. The set of resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource, and there is one or more reference signal resources in each SRS resource set, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource in the SRS resource set corresponding to the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to send the SRS resource set. The second node transmits signals, thereby solving the technical problems that the first node generates self-interference in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the MIMO transmission is restricted due to hardware problems of the first node.
另一种是SRS资源指的是一个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set中多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource,一个或多个SRS resource对应同一种工作模式下,所述一个或多个SRS resource为网络设备配置的SRS资源。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource,有利于第一I节点选择与所处工作模式下相适应的SRS resource(一种工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中的SRS resource,并使用所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The other is that the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, and multiple reference signal resources in the SRS resource set, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource, one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode, and the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first I node to select the SRS resource suitable for the working mode in which it is located (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources) and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the first node generates self-interference, and the first node generates self-interference. A technical problem in which the MIMO transmission is limited due to hardware problems of the node equipment.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备配置第一资源集还包括:In a possible implementation manner, configuring the first resource set by the network device further includes:
若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述网络设备为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源的集合分别配置对应的标识;If the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, the network device configures corresponding identifiers for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively;
若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述网络设备为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源分别配置对应的标识。If the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the network device configures corresponding identifiers for a plurality of reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively.
本申请实施例,若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,即第一资源集为多个 SRS resource set的集合时,网络设备为每个SRS resource set配置相应的标识;若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合时,网络设备会为每个SRS resource配置标识。配置标识能够有效地区分每个SRS资源。In this embodiment of the present application, if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, that is, when the first resource set is a set of multiple SRS resource sets, the network device configures a corresponding identifier for each SRS resource set; if When the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the network device will configure an identifier for each SRS resource. The configuration identifier can effectively distinguish each SRS resource.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备配置第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
所述网络设备向第二节点发送第一资源集的信息。The network device sends the information of the first resource set to the second node.
本申请实施例,所述第一资源集的信息包括第一节点上报的MIMO参数的信息以及网络设备配置的SRS资源的信息。网络设备在配置SRS资源后,会将SRS资源的信息以及第一节点上报的MIMO参数的信息发送给第二节点(第二节点是第一节点的上级节点),以便第二节点为第一节点选择SRS resource等资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device. After configuring the SRS resources, the network device will send the information of the SRS resources and the information of the MIMO parameters reported by the first node to the second node (the second node is the upper-level node of the first node), so that the second node is the first node Select resources such as SRS resource.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device receives MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node, including:
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点上报的第二参数;其中,所述第二参数为在第一工作模式下,所述第一节点的MIMO参数;receiving, by the network device, the second parameter reported by the first node; wherein the second parameter is the MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode;
所述网络设备向所述第一节点发送第一请求信令;sending, by the network device, first request signaling to the first node;
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点基于所述第一请求信令上报的第三参数;其中,所述第三参数是除所述第一工作模式以外的其他模式的参数。The network device receives a third parameter reported by the first node based on the first request signaling; wherein the third parameter is a parameter of another mode other than the first working mode.
本申请实施例,网络设备接收第一节点上报的MIMO参数还有另外一种方式,网络设备先接收第一节点上报的对应时分复用模式下的MIMO参数。然后,网络设备向第一节点发送第一请求信令,所述第一请求信令用于指示第一节点上报对应其它工作模式下的一套或多套MIMO参数。网络设备接收第一节点根据第一请求信令上报的MIMO参数,并配置的SRS资源。In this embodiment of the present application, there is another way for the network device to receive the MIMO parameters reported by the first node. The network device first receives the MIMO parameters in the corresponding time division multiplexing mode reported by the first node. Then, the network device sends first request signaling to the first node, where the first request signaling is used to instruct the first node to report one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to other working modes. The network device receives the MIMO parameters and configured SRS resources reported by the first node according to the first request signaling.
在本申请实施例中,所述第二参数可以为第一节点上报的、时分复用模式下的MIMO参数;所述第一工作模式为时分复用模式;所述第三参数可以为第一节点根据第一请求信令上报的MIMO参数;网络设备可以指的是网络设备等能够实现有线通信网络与无线终端之间的无线信号传输的设备。In this embodiment of the present application, the second parameter may be a MIMO parameter in a time division multiplexing mode reported by the first node; the first working mode is a time division multiplexing mode; the third parameter may be the first The MIMO parameter reported by the node according to the first request signaling; the network device may refer to a device such as a network device that can implement wireless signal transmission between a wired communication network and a wireless terminal.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
所述网络设备根据所述第二参数,配置第一参考信号资源的集合,并将所述第一参考信号资源的集合发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一参考信号资源的集合包括多个功能相同的参考信号资源;The network device configures a set of first reference signal resources according to the second parameter, and sends the set of first reference signal resources to the first node; wherein the set of first reference signal resources Including multiple reference signal resources with the same function;
所述网络设备向所述第一节点发送第一请求信令;sending, by the network device, first request signaling to the first node;
所述网络设备基于所述第三参数,配置资源集,并将所述资源集发送给所述第一节点。The network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
本申请实施例,所述第二参数为在时分复用模式下的第一节点的MIMO传输参数,所述第一参考信号资源的集合为与在时分复用模式下的第一节点的MIMO传输参数对应的SRS resource set;所述资源集为网络设备根据所述第三参数配置的SRS资源。网络设备配 置资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合,有利于第一节点选择与当前所处工作模式最适应的SRS resource,并使用所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the second parameter is the MIMO transmission parameter of the first node in the time division multiplexing mode, and the set of the first reference signal resources is the MIMO transmission with the first node in the time division multiplexing mode The SRS resource set corresponding to the parameter; the resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device according to the third parameter. The network equipment configuration resource set and the set of the first reference signal resources are helpful for the first node to select the SRS resource most suitable for the current working mode, and use the configuration information in the selected SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, Therefore, in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, the self-interference of the IAB relay node and the technical problems of the limited MIMO transmission caused by the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment are solved.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
所述网络设备根据所述第二参数,配置第一参考信号资源的集合;其中,所述第一参考信号资源的集合包括多个功能相同的参考信号资源;The network device configures a set of first reference signal resources according to the second parameter; wherein, the set of first reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources with the same function;
所述网络设备向所述第一节点发送第一请求信令;sending, by the network device, first request signaling to the first node;
所述网络设备基于所述第三参数,配置资源集,并将所述资源集和第一参考信号的集合发送给所述第一节点。The network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set and the set of the first reference signal to the first node.
本申请实施例,网络设备配置资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合,有利于下级IAB节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向上级IAB节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,IAB中继节点产生自干扰,以及IAB节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the network device configuration resource set and the first reference signal resource set are helpful for the lower-level IAB node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the upper-level IAB node, thereby It solves the technical problems that the IAB relay node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the IAB node equipment causes the MIMO transmission to be limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device sends the first resource set to the first node, including:
所述网络设备向所述第一节点发送第一请求信令;sending, by the network device, first request signaling to the first node;
所述网络设备基于所述第三参数,配置资源集,并将所述资源集发送给所述第一节点。The network device configures a resource set based on the third parameter, and sends the resource set to the first node.
本申请实施例,网络设备配置资源集,有利于第一节点选择相应工作模式下对应的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device configures the resource set, which is helpful for the first node to select the corresponding SRS resource in the corresponding working mode, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thereby solving the problem of space division transmission and uplink transmission. In the scenario of full-duplex transmission, the first node generates self-interference, and the hardware problem of the first node causes the technical problem that the MIMO transmission is limited.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述资源集包括多个参考信号资源的集合;其中,所述多个参考信号资源的集合基于所述第三参数所配置的,且所述一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源,功能相同;或者In a possible implementation manner, the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signal resources; wherein, the set of multiple reference signal resources is configured based on the third parameter, and the one reference signal resource reference signal resources in the set of , with the same function; or
所述资源集包括一个参考信号资源的集合,其中所述参考信号资源的集合包括多个基于第三参数对应配置的参考信号资源。The resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, wherein the set of reference signal resources includes a plurality of reference signal resources correspondingly configured based on the third parameter.
本申请实施例,所述资源集指的是网络设备为第一节点配置的SRS资源的集合,网络设备配置的SRS资源分为两种类型:一种是资源集为多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set为网络设备配置的SRS资源,每个SRS resource set中有一个或多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource set,有利于第一节点选择与当前所处工作模式最适应的SRS resource set中的SRS resource,并使用 SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,以及第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the resource set refers to a set of SRS resources configured by the network device for the first node, and the SRS resources configured by the network device are divided into two types: one is the resource set that is the resources of multiple reference signals. Set, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the network device, and each SRS resource set has one or more reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources refer to SRS resource. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resource sets corresponding to MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the first node to select the SRS resource set in the SRS resource set that is most suitable for the current working mode, and use the SRS resource set in the SRS resource set. The configuration information transmits signals to the second node, thereby solving the technical problems of self-interference generated by the first node and limited MIMO transmission caused by hardware problems of the first node in the scenarios of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission.
另一种是SRS资源指的是一个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合指的是SRS resource set,SRS resource set中包含多个参考信号资源,所述参考信号资源指的是SRS resource,一个或多个SRS resource对应同一种工作模式,所述一个或多个SRS resource为网络设备配置的SRS资源。网络设备配置多个分别与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS resource,有利于下级IAB节点选择与其所处工作模式最适应的SRS resource(一种工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中的SRS resource,并使用SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点传输信号,从而解决了在空分发送以及上行全双工发送的场景下,第一节点产生自干扰,第一节点设备硬件问题导致MIMO传输受到限制的技术问题。The other is that the SRS resource refers to a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources refers to the SRS resource set, and the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resource refers to the SRS resource, one or more SRS resources correspond to the same working mode, and the one or more SRS resources are SRS resources configured by the network device. The network device is configured with multiple SRS resources corresponding to the MIMO parameters in different working modes, which is beneficial for the lower-level IAB node to select the SRS resource most suitable for its working mode (one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources). SRS resource, and use the configuration information in the SRS resource to transmit signals to the second node, thus solving the problem that the first node generates self-interference in the scenario of space division transmission and uplink full-duplex transmission, and the hardware problem of the first node equipment causes MIMO Technical issues where transmission is restricted.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述网络设备配置所述第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
所述网络设备向第一节点发送第一指示信息;sending, by the network device, first indication information to the first node;
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,发送的第一参考信号;receiving, by the network device, a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。The network device receives the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
本申请实施例,所述第一指示信息为网络设备向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向网络设备发送SRS信号;所述第一参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号为第一节点向网络设备发送的SRS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information is a scheduling signaling sent by the network device to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the network device; the first reference signal resource is: The SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling; the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the network device.
若网络设备是第一节点的上级节点时,且当第一节点是基于码本的方式向网络设备传输信号时,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向网络设备发送不可用的TPMI,TPMI的作用是用来指示预编码矩阵的。第一节点通过向网络设备发送不可用的TPMI这种方式,在网络设备从码本中选择预编码矩阵时提供参考,使网络设备在选择预编码矩阵时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的预编码矩阵。If the network device is the upper-level node of the first node, and when the first node transmits signals to the network device based on the codebook, the first node will send the unavailable TPMI to the network device after sending the SRS signal, and the TPMI of the TPMI will be sent to the network device. The role is used to indicate the precoding matrix. By sending the unavailable TPMI to the network device, the first node provides a reference when the network device selects the precoding matrix from the codebook, so that the network device can avoid those when using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the precoding matrix. , a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述网络设备配置所述第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, after configuring the first resource set, the network device further includes:
网络设备向第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号;The network device sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node;
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,发送的第二参考信号;receiving, by the network device, a second reference signal sent by the first node using the first channel state reference signal and second reference signal resources in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
所述网络设备接收所述第一节点上报的第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。The network device receives the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
本申请实施例,所述第二指示信息为网络设备向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向网络设备发送SRS信号;所述第二参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号为第一节点向网络设备发送的SRS信号;所述第一信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the second indication information is a scheduling signaling sent by the network device to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send the SRS signal to the network device; the second reference signal resource is: The SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling; the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the network device; the first channel state reference signal is the CSI-RS signal.
若网络设备为第一节点的上级节点时,网络设备向第一节点发送一个调度信令,用于让第一节点向网络设备发送的SRS信号,当第一节点是基于非码本的方式向网络设备传输信号时,网络设备除了会向第一节点发送一个调度信令之外,还会向第一节点发送CSI-RS信号,用于第一节点估计上行信道,从而得到一个预编码矩阵。此外,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向网络设备发送不可用的SRI,SRI的作用是用来指示SRS resource的。第一节点通过向网络设备发送不可用的SRI这种方式,可以给网络设备在选择SRS resource时一个参考,以便网络设备在选择SRS resource时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的SRS resource。If the network device is the upper-level node of the first node, the network device sends a scheduling signaling to the first node, which is used to let the first node send the SRS signal to the network device. When the network device transmits a signal, in addition to sending a scheduling signaling to the first node, the network device also sends a CSI-RS signal to the first node for the first node to estimate an uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix. In addition, after sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the network device, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource. By sending the unavailable SRI to the network device, the first node can give the network device a reference when selecting the SRS resource, so that the network device can avoid those using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource. SRS resource for problems such as strong interference.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数的方法,其特征在于,包括:In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, which is characterized by comprising:
第二节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息;The second node sends the first indication information to the first node;
所述第二节点接收所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,发送的第一参考信号;receiving, by the second node, a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
所述第二节点接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI;receiving, by the second node, the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。Wherein, the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
本申请实施例,所述第一指示信息为第二节点向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向第二节点发送SRS信号;所述第一参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号为第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the first indication information is scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node; the first reference signal The resource is the SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling; the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node.
当第一节点是基于码本的方式向第二节点传输信号时,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向第二节点发送不可用的TPMI,TPMI的作用是用来指示预编码矩阵的。第一节点通过向第二节点发送不可用的TPMI这种方式,可以给第二节点在码本中选择预编码矩阵时一个参考,使第二节点在选择预编码矩阵时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的预编码矩阵。When the first node transmits a signal to the second node based on the codebook, the first node sends an unavailable TPMI to the second node after sending the SRS signal, and the function of the TPMI is to indicate the precoding matrix. By sending the unavailable TPMI to the second node, the first node can give the second node a reference when selecting a precoding matrix in the codebook, so that the second node can avoid those problems that may affect the first node when selecting a precoding matrix. When using MIMO transmission, a precoding matrix that may cause problems such as strong interference.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息;In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,端口指的是antenna port,简称port,是逻辑端口;第一指示信息包括不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息。对于同一个TPMI,在不同的工作模式对应的码本中所指示的预编码矩阵可能不同,所述不同工作模式的指示信息用于指明第一节点所发送的TPMI对应的何种工作模式所对应的码本,避免了一个TPMI指示多个码本中的预编码矩阵的情况。In the embodiment of this application, a port refers to an antenna port, abbreviated as a port, which is a logical port; the first indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI under the different working modes. For the same TPMI, the precoding matrices indicated in the codebooks corresponding to different working modes may be different, and the indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate which working mode corresponds to the TPMI sent by the first node. codebook, avoiding the situation where one TPMI indicates precoding matrices in multiple codebooks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息之前,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, before the second node sends the first indication information to the first node, the method further includes:
所述第二节点接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。The second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
本申请实施例,所述第一资源集的信息包括第一节点上报的MIMO参数的信息以及网络设备配置的SRS资源的信息。网络设备在配置SRS资源后,会将SRS资源的信息以及第一节点上报的MIMO参数的信息发送给第二节点(第二节点时第一节点的上级节点),以便第二节点为第一节点选择SRS resource等资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device. After configuring the SRS resources, the network device will send the information of the SRS resources and the information of the MIMO parameters reported by the first node to the second node (the second node is the upper-level node of the first node), so that the second node is the first node Select resources such as SRS resource.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数的方法,包括:In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a transmission parameter, including:
第二节点向第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号;The second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node;
所述第二节点接收所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,发送的第二参考信号;receiving, by the second node, a second reference signal sent by the first node based on the second indication information using the first channel state reference signal and second reference signal resources in the first resource set;
所述第二节点接收所述第一节点上报的第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI;receiving, by the second node, the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。Wherein, the first node is a downstream node of the second node.
本申请实施例,所述第二指示信息为第二节点向第一节点发送的调度信令,用于指示第一节点选择相应的SRS resource向第二节点发送SRS信号;所述第二参考信号资源为根据调度信令选择的SRS resource;所述第一参考信号为第一节点向第二节点发送的SRS信号;所述第一信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号。In this embodiment of the present application, the second indication information is scheduling signaling sent by the second node to the first node, and is used to instruct the first node to select a corresponding SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the second node; the second reference signal The resource is the SRS resource selected according to the scheduling signaling; the first reference signal is the SRS signal sent by the first node to the second node; the first channel state reference signal is the CSI-RS signal.
当第一节点是基于非码本的方式向第二节点传输信号时,第二节点除了会向第一节点发送一个调度信令之外,还会向第一节点发送CSI-RS信号,用于第一节点估计上行信道,从而得到一个预编码矩阵。此外,第一节点在发送SRS信号后会向第二节点发送不可用的SRI,SRI的作用是用来指示SRS resource的。第一节点通过向第二节点发送不可用的SRI这种方式,可以给第二节点在选择SRS resource时一个参考,以便第二节点在选择SRS resource时规避那些对第一节点使用MIMO传输时,可能带来强干扰等问题的SRS resource。When the first node transmits signals to the second node in a non-codebook-based manner, the second node will not only send a scheduling signaling to the first node, but also send a CSI-RS signal to the first node for The first node estimates the uplink channel, thereby obtaining a precoding matrix. In addition, after sending the SRS signal, the first node will send the unavailable SRI to the second node, and the role of the SRI is to indicate the SRS resource. By sending the unavailable SRI to the second node, the first node can give the second node a reference when selecting the SRS resource, so that the second node can avoid those using MIMO transmission for the first node when selecting the SRS resource. SRS resource that may cause problems such as strong interference.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息;In a possible implementation manner, the second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
本申请实施例,端口指的是antenna port,简称port,是逻辑端口;第二指示信息包括不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息。对于同一个SRI,如果SRS resource对应的工作模式不同,其指示的SRS resource可能也会有所不同。所述不同工作模式的指示信息用于指明第一节点所发送的SRI对应的是何种工作模式所对应的SRS resource,避免了一个SRI指示多个SRS resource的问题。In the embodiment of this application, the port refers to an antenna port, referred to as a port, which is a logical port; the second indication information includes indication information of different working modes and indication information of unavailable SRIs under the different working modes. For the same SRI, if the working mode corresponding to the SRS resource is different, the indicated SRS resource may also be different. The indication information of the different working modes is used to indicate the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode the SRI sent by the first node corresponds to, avoiding the problem that one SRI indicates multiple SRS resources.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二节点向所述第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号之前,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, before the second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node, the method further includes:
所述第二节点接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。The second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
本申请实施例,所述第一资源集的信息包括第一节点上报的MIMO参数的信息以及网络设备配置的SRS资源的信息。第二节点在向第一节点发送调度信令之前会接受网络设备 发送的第一资源集的信息,以便第二节点为第一节点选择SRS resource等资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the information of the first resource set includes the information of the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and the information of the SRS resource configured by the network device. Before sending the scheduling signaling to the first node, the second node will accept the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, so that the second node can select resources such as SRS resource for the first node.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第一节点,包括:In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a first node, including:
上报单元,用于将不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备;a reporting unit, used to report the MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device;
接收单元,用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。A receiving unit, configured to receive a first resource set sent by the network device; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
第一指示信息接收单元,用于所述接收单元接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集之后,接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息;a first indication information receiving unit, configured to receive the first indication information sent by the second node after the receiving unit receives the first resource set sent by the network device;
第一参考信号资源调用单元,用于基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源;a first reference signal resource calling unit, configured to use the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
第一参考信号发送单元,用于向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号;a first reference signal sending unit, configured to send a first reference signal to the second node;
第一信息上报单元,用于向所述第二节点上报第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。The first information reporting unit is configured to report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一参考信号资源调用单元,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
第一参考信号资源选择单元,用于根据第一状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。A first reference signal resource selection unit, configured to select a first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the first state information.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
第二指示信息接收单元,用于接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息;a second indication information receiving unit, configured to receive the second indication information sent by the second node;
第一信道状态参考信号接收单元,用于接收第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal receiving unit, configured to receive the first channel state reference signal;
第一信道状态参考信号调用单元,用于使用所述第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal calling unit, configured to use the first channel state reference signal;
第二参考信号资源调用单元,用于基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源;a second reference signal resource calling unit, configured to use the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
第二信息上报单元,用于向所述第二节点上报第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。The second information reporting unit is configured to report the second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二参考信号资源调用单元,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the second reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
第二参考信号资源选择单元,用于根据第二状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。The second reference signal resource selection unit is configured to select the first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为网络设备,包括:In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, wherein the apparatus for determining transmission parameters is a network device, including:
接收单元,用于接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数;a receiving unit, configured to receive MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node;
资源配置单元,用于配置第一资源集;a resource configuration unit, used to configure the first resource set;
发送单元,用于将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。A sending unit, configured to send the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述资源配置单元,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the resource configuration unit further includes:
标识配置单元,用于若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源的集合分别配置对应的标识;an identification configuration unit, configured to respectively configure corresponding identifications for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources;
若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源分别配置对应的标识。If the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
信息发送单元,用于所述资源配置单元配置第一资源集之后,向第二节点发送第一资源集的信息。An information sending unit, configured to send the information of the first resource set to the second node after the resource configuration unit configures the first resource set.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第二节点,包括:In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a second node, including:
第一指示信息发送单元,用于向第一节点发送第一指示信息;a first indication information sending unit, configured to send the first indication information to the first node;
第一参考信号接收单元,用于接收所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,发送的第一参考信号;a first reference signal receiving unit, configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
第一信息接收单元,用于接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。A first information receiving unit, configured to receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device for determining transmission parameters further includes:
信息接收单元,用于接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。An information receiving unit, configured to receive the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第二节点,包括:In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device for determining transmission parameters, wherein the device for determining transmission parameters is a second node, including:
第二指示信息发送单元,用于向第一节点发送第二指示信息;a second indication information sending unit, configured to send the second indication information to the first node;
第一信道状态参考信号发送单元,用于向第一节点发送第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal sending unit, configured to send the first channel state reference signal to the first node;
第二参考信号接收单元,用于接收所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,发送的第二参考信号;The second reference signal receiving unit is configured to receive the second reference signal sent by the first node based on the second indication information using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resources in the first resource set. reference signal;
第二信息接收单元,用于接收所述第一节点上报的第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。The second information receiving unit is configured to receive the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,包括处理器和存储器;In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行上述第一方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数方法。The memory is used for storing program codes, and the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method for determining transmission parameters in the first aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,包括处理器和存储器;In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行上述第二方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数方法。Wherein, the memory is used for storing program codes, and the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method for determining transmission parameters in the second aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种确定传输参数装置,包括处理器和存储器;In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for determining transmission parameters, including a processor and a memory;
其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行上述第三方面和第四方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数方法。Wherein, the memory is used to store program codes, and the processor is used to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the methods for determining transmission parameters in the third aspect and the fourth aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得第一节点实现上述第一方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数的方法、或网络设备实现上述第二方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数的方法、或第二节点实现上述第三方面和第四方面及其各种可能的实现方式中的确定传输参数的方法。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, enables a first node to implement the first aspect and the The method for determining transmission parameters in various possible implementations thereof, or the method for determining transmission parameters in the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementations by the network device, or the second node implementing the above-mentioned third aspect and the first. Methods for determining transmission parameters in the four aspects and various possible implementations thereof.
第十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序,该计算机程序包括指令,当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得第一节点可以执行上述第一方面及其各种可能的实现方式中第一节点所执行的流程、或网络设备可以执行上述第二方面及其各种可能的实现方式中网络设备所执行的流程、或使得第二节点可以执行上述第三方面和第四方面及其各种可能的实现方式中第二节点所执行的流程。In a thirteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program, where the computer program includes instructions, when the computer program is executed by a computer, so that the first node can execute the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof The process performed by the first node or the network device may perform the process performed by the network device in the second aspect and its various possible implementations, or the second node may perform the third aspect and the fourth aspect and Processes executed by the second node in various possible implementation manners thereof.
第十四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持第一节点实现第一方面及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能、或网络设备实现第二方面及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能、或第二节点实现第三方面和第四方面及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能。In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor configured to support the first node to implement the functions involved in the methods in the first aspect and its various possible manners, or network devices The functions involved in the method in the second aspect and its various possible manners are implemented, or the second node implements the functions involved in the methods in the third aspect and the fourth aspect and the methods in its various possible manners.
在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器用于保存第一节点或网络设备或第二节点必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其它分立器件。In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the first node or the network device or the second node. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供一种天线单面板数据流映射示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping on a single panel of an antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种天线多面板数据流映射示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an antenna multi-panel data stream mapping provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种回传参数传输的系统架构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for backhaul parameter transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图;4 is a flowchart of a MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种码本示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of a codebook provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种SRS资源示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of an SRS resource provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO基于非码本的上行链路传输流程图;7 is a flowchart of a MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本实施例提供的一种MIMO上行链路的信号传输系统架构图;FIG. 8 is an architecture diagram of a signal transmission system of a MIMO uplink provided by this embodiment;
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种IAB节点设备的结构图;9 is a structural diagram of an IAB node device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图;10 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图;11 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于非码本的上行链路传输方法流程图;12 is a flowchart of another MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO上行链路的传输流程图;FIG. 13 is a transmission flowchart of a MIMO uplink provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;14 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;16 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;17 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;18 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图19是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。在本文中提及“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或者特性可以包含在本实施例申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或是备选的实施例。本领域技术人员可以显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。Obviously, the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all of the embodiments. Reference herein to an "embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the present embodiment application. The appearances of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are they separate or alternative embodiments that are mutually exclusive with other embodiments. Those skilled in the art will understand, both explicitly and implicitly, that the embodiments described herein may be combined with other embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present application.
本申请的说明书和权利要求书及所述附图中术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”等是区别于不同的对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元,或者可选地,还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或者可选地还包括这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first", "second", "third", etc. in the description and claims of the present application and the drawings are used to distinguish different objects, and are not used to describe a specific order. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a series of steps or units are included, or optionally, steps or units not listed, or optionally other steps or units inherent to the process, method, product, or apparatus are included.
附图中仅示出了与本申请相关的部分而非全部内容。在更加详细地讨论示例性实施例之前,应当提到的是,一些示例性实施例被描述成作为流程图描绘的处理或方法。虽然流程图将各项操作(或步骤)描述成顺序的处理,但是其中的许多操作可以并行地、并发地或者同时实施。此外,各项操作的顺序可以被重新安排。当其操作完成时所述处理可以被终止,但是还可以具有未包括在附图中的附加步骤。所述处理可以对应于方法、函数、规程、子例程、子程序等等。The drawings show only some but not all of the content related to the present application. Before discussing the exemplary embodiments in greater detail, it should be mentioned that some of the exemplary embodiments are described as processes or methods depicted as flowcharts. Although a flowchart depicts various operations (or steps) as a sequential process, many of the operations may be performed in parallel, concurrently, or concurrently. Additionally, the order of operations can be rearranged. The process may be terminated when its operation is complete, but may also have additional steps not included in the figures. The processes may correspond to methods, functions, procedures, subroutines, subroutines, and the like.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”、“单元”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件或执行中的软件。例如,单元可以是但不限于在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或分布在两个或多个计算机之间。此外,这些单元可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。单元可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一单元交互的第二单元数据。例如,通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component," "module," "system," "unit," etc. used in this specification are used to refer to a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, an element may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or distributed between two or more computers. In addition, these units can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A unit may, for example, be based on a signal with one or more data packets (eg, data from a second unit interacting with another unit between local systems, distributed systems, and/or networks. For example, the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
首先,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便本领域技术人员理解。First, some terms in the embodiments of the present application are explained so as to be understood by those skilled in the art.
(1)物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Share Channel,PUSCH)用于承载来自传输信道(Uplink Shared Channel,USCH)的数据,所谓共享指的是同一物理信道可由多个用户分时使用,或者说信道具有较短的持续时间。(1) The Physical Uplink Share Channel (PUSCH) is used to carry data from the transmission channel (Uplink Shared Channel, USCH). The so-called sharing means that the same physical channel can be used by multiple users in time-sharing, or the channel have a shorter duration.
(2)带内中继,带内中继是回传链路与接入链路共享相同频段的中继方案,由于没有使用额外的频谱资源,带内中继具有频谱效率高及部署成本低等优点,带内中继一般具有半双工的约束。(2) In-band relay. In-band relay is a relay scheme in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, in-band relay has high spectral efficiency and low deployment cost. and other advantages, in-band relays generally have half-duplex constraints.
(3)一体化接入回传(Integrated Access and backhaul,IAB),NR的带内中继方案被称为一体化接入回传(IAB),而中继节点被称为IAB节点。当IAB节点正常工作时,接入链路与回传链路以时分,空分或频分的方式进行资源复用。以时分复用场景(TDM)为例,回传链路与接入链路在不同的时刻工作,因此IAB节点需要在回传链路的收发与接入链路的收发之间切换。当回传与接入链路无间隔切换时,即接入链路与符号回传链路符号连续时,IAB节点具有最高的资源利用率。然而在实现中,由于功放的开关时间、传输距离、非理想同步等各种因素,回传链路与接入链路不能实现无间隔切换。此时,IAB节点需要确定回传链路和接入链路的可用/不可用符号集合。IAB节点接收网络设备的配置信息,可以由IAB节点的MT接收,也可以由IAB节点的DU接收。示例性的,IAB节点MT接收的配置信息由RRC信令进行承载,IAB节点DU接收的配置信息由F1-AP接口信令承载。一般而言,下级IAB节点接收网络设备发送的,用于发送的配置,例如SRS resource、SRS resource set配置,由IAB MT接收RRC信令实现;上级IAB节点接收网络设备发送的,用于接收下级节点发送信号的配置或用于调度下级节点的配置信息,由IAB DU接收F1-AP接口信令实现。(3) Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB), the in-band relay scheme of NR is called Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called IAB node. When the IAB node is working normally, the access link and the backhaul link perform resource multiplexing by time division, space division or frequency division. Taking a time division multiplexing (TDM) scenario as an example, the backhaul link and the access link work at different times, so the IAB node needs to switch between the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the transmission and reception of the access link. When the backhaul and access links are switched without interval, that is, when the symbols of the access link and the symbol backhaul link are consecutive, the IAB node has the highest resource utilization rate. However, in implementation, due to various factors such as switching time of the power amplifier, transmission distance, and non-ideal synchronization, the backhaul link and the access link cannot be switched without interval. At this point, the IAB node needs to determine the set of available/unavailable symbols for the backhaul link and the access link. The IAB node receives the configuration information of the network device, which may be received by the MT of the IAB node or by the DU of the IAB node. Exemplarily, the configuration information received by the IAB node MT is carried by RRC signaling, and the configuration information received by the IAB node DU is carried by F1-AP interface signaling. Generally speaking, the lower-level IAB node receives the configuration sent by the network device for sending, such as SRS resource and SRS resource set configuration, which is realized by the IAB MT receiving RRC signaling; the upper-level IAB node receives the transmission from the network device and is used to receive the lower The configuration of the signal sent by the node or the configuration information used to schedule the subordinate node is realized by the IAB DU receiving the F1-AP interface signaling.
(4)探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS),用于估计上行信道频域信息,做频率选择性调度。(4) Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), which is used to estimate uplink channel frequency domain information for frequency selective scheduling.
(5)下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI),由下行物理控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)承载,基站发给终端的下行控制信息,包括传输格式、资源分配、HARQ信息、功率控制等。(5) Downlink Control Information (DCI), carried by the Downlink Physical Control Channel (PDCCH), the downlink control information sent by the base station to the terminal, including transmission format, resource allocation, HARQ information, power control Wait.
(6)信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal,CSI-RS),在5G NR系统中主要用于获取信道状态信息,用于调度、链路自适应以及和MIMO相关的传输设置;用于波束管理,终端和基站侧波束的赋形权值的获取,用于支持波束管理过程。(6) Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS), which is mainly used to obtain channel state information in the 5G NR system for scheduling, link adaptation, and MIMO-related transmission settings; It is used for beam management, and the acquisition of beam shaping weights at the terminal and base station sides is used to support the beam management process.
(7)发射预编码矩阵指示(Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator,TPMI),用于指示码本中的预编码矩阵。(7) Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI) is used to indicate the precoding matrix in the codebook.
(8)探测参考信号资源指示(SRS Resource Indicator,SRI),用于指示SRS resource set中的SRS resource。(8) Sounding Reference Signal Resource Indicator (SRS Resource Indicator, SRI), used to indicate the SRS resource in the SRS resource set.
本申请权利要求书和说明书中所述的网络设备指的是基站等能够实现有线通信网络与无线终端或中继节点之间的无线信号传输的设备;其中,所述基站还包括宿主基站。The network equipment described in the claims and description of the present application refers to equipment such as base stations that can realize wireless signal transmission between wired communication networks and wireless terminals or relay nodes; wherein the base stations also include host base stations.
请参见图1,图1是本申请实施例提供一种天线单面板数据流映射示意图。面板一般 是指是天线面板panel,在实际情况下,单一天线的方向性是有限的,为适合各种场合的应用,将工作在同一频率的两个或两个以上的单个天线,按照一定的要求进行馈电和空间排列构成天线阵列,构成天线阵列的天线辐射单元称为阵元,在一个面板上有多个天线阵元。在实际的应用中,基站和终端通过使用面板来提升其电磁波的传输能力。Please refer to FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping on a single panel of an antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application. The panel generally refers to the antenna panel panel. In practice, the directivity of a single antenna is limited. In order to be suitable for applications in various occasions, two or more single antennas operating at the same frequency will be used according to certain It is required to carry out feeding and spatial arrangement to form an antenna array. The antenna radiating element that constitutes the antenna array is called an array element, and there are multiple antenna array elements on one panel. In practical applications, base stations and terminals use panels to improve their electromagnetic wave transmission capabilities.
在MIMO系统中,上层的业务流进行信道编码后形成码字,码字用以区分不同的数据流,以便让MIMO发送多路数据流,实现空间复用。但通常情况下,码字与发送天线的数量不一致,需要将码字流映射到不同的发送天线上,因此需要使用层映射与预编码,层映射与预编码实际上是“映射码字到发送天线”过程的两个的子过程。In a MIMO system, the upper-layer service streams are channel-coded to form codewords, which are used to distinguish different data streams, so that MIMO can transmit multiple data streams and realize spatial multiplexing. But in general, the number of codewords is inconsistent with the number of transmitting antennas, and the codeword stream needs to be mapped to different transmitting antennas, so layer mapping and precoding need to be used. Layer mapping and precoding are actually "mapping codewords to transmitting antennas" Two sub-processes of the "Antenna" process.
层映射就是按照定的规则将码字流重新映射到多个层(图1中只有1个层),然后在通过预编码将层上的数据流映射到天线的逻辑端口port AP0~AP3上,生成OFDM信号,然后通过各自的收发器单元TXRU将OFDM符号一对一映射到天线阵元上去。Layer mapping is to remap the codeword stream to multiple layers according to certain rules (there is only one layer in Figure 1), and then map the data stream on the layer to the logical ports AP0~AP3 of the antenna through precoding. OFDM signals are generated, and then the OFDM symbols are mapped one-to-one to the antenna elements through the respective transceiver units TXRU.
在图1中是一个层layer到四个天线port AP0~AP3的数据的传输,其中,天线port AP0~AP3是逻辑端口。如果天线的port对应的是同一个面板,且天线的port之间无时延,可做相干传输(联合预编码),即层可将数据流通过预编码矩阵将数据流映射到同一面板上的天线port上去,并赋予port上的OFDM信号相应的权值,这样,当使用MIMO向上级节点传输信号时,可以增强传输信号的强度,提高传输效率。In Figure 1, it is the transmission of data from one layer to four antenna ports AP0-AP3, wherein the antenna ports AP0-AP3 are logical ports. If the port of the antenna corresponds to the same panel, and there is no delay between the ports of the antenna, coherent transmission (joint precoding) can be performed, that is, the layer can map the data stream to the data stream on the same panel through the precoding matrix. The antenna port is connected to the port, and corresponding weights are assigned to the OFDM signal on the port. In this way, when MIMO is used to transmit signals to the upper node, the strength of the transmitted signal can be enhanced and the transmission efficiency can be improved.
请参见图2,图2是本申请实施例提供的一种天线多面板数据流映射示意图。图2为一个层映射数据流到四个port的传输。在实际应用中,终端往往有多个天线面板,可配置在终端的不同位置,使得信号在传输时间、传输空间上更具多样性。这样设计的一方面是,拥有多个天线面板,给了终端更多发射信号的空间选择。例如,当用户用智能手机拨打电话时,用户的手掌遮挡了智能手机安装的一个天线面板,影响天线发射信号,若在智能手机的其他位置也安装了天线面板时,智能手机可以通过未被遮挡的天线面板发送信号,从而不影响通信的质量。另外一方面,终端具有波束赋形的设计,即:通过调整多天线间的相位,使得通信信号集中在某个特定的方向,扩大在某个方向基站接收信号的强度。但是,通过这种方式,往往信号的覆盖率不足,因此,通过多面板的设计,可以使得终端在不同的位置,发射信号的方向不同,减少波束赋形带来的空间上覆盖率不足的问题。Please refer to FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of data flow mapping of an antenna multi-panel provided by an embodiment of the present application. Figure 2 shows the transmission of a layer mapping data stream to four ports. In practical applications, the terminal often has multiple antenna panels, which can be configured at different positions of the terminal, so that the signal has more diversity in transmission time and transmission space. One aspect of this design is that there are multiple antenna panels, giving the terminal more space options for transmitting signals. For example, when a user uses a smartphone to make a call, the user's palm covers an antenna panel installed on the smartphone, which affects the antenna's transmission of signals. If the antenna panel is also installed at other locations on the smartphone, the smartphone can pass The antenna panel transmits the signal so that the quality of the communication is not affected. On the other hand, the terminal has a beamforming design, that is, by adjusting the phase between multiple antennas, the communication signals are concentrated in a certain direction, and the strength of the signal received by the base station in a certain direction is enlarged. However, in this way, the coverage of the signal is often insufficient. Therefore, through the multi-panel design, the terminals can be in different locations and transmit signals in different directions, reducing the problem of insufficient spatial coverage caused by beamforming. .
在图2中,不同的天线port可在不同的面板上传输,逻辑端口port AP0和port AP2在面板1上,逻辑端口port AP1和port AP3在面板2上。天线的一个逻辑端口port对应多个物理天线,一个逻辑端口port对应的天线传输的信号仅只有相位上的偏移,其它特性是相同的。另外,信号在不同的面板间传输,由于硬件原因造成面板间的传输时延,因此,不同面板间的天线逻辑端口port不能相干传输,即:不能联合预编码。在图2中,通过层映射,将码字流映射到一个层上,由于图2中是多面板,因此,层通过两次预编码将数据流映射到天线逻辑端口port AP0~AP3上,然后通过数字波束赋形和资源粒子的映射生成OFDM信号,并将生成的OFDM信号发送给收发器单元TXRU,收发器单元将其受到的OFDM信号进行模拟波束赋形,即:通过预编码矩阵赋予逻辑端口port上OFDM信号权值,用移相器完成天线相位的调整,然后将信号发射出去。In Figure 2, different antenna ports can be transmitted on different panels, logical ports port AP0 and port AP2 are on panel 1, and logical ports port AP1 and port AP3 are on panel 2. One logical port port of an antenna corresponds to multiple physical antennas, and the signal transmitted by the antenna corresponding to one logical port port only has an offset in phase, and other characteristics are the same. In addition, when the signal is transmitted between different panels, the transmission delay between the panels is caused by hardware reasons. Therefore, the antenna logical port ports between different panels cannot be coherently transmitted, that is, cannot be jointly precoded. In Figure 2, the codeword stream is mapped to a layer through layer mapping. Since Figure 2 is a multi-panel, the layer maps the data stream to the antenna logical port ports AP0~AP3 through two precoding, and then The OFDM signal is generated by digital beamforming and mapping of resource particles, and the generated OFDM signal is sent to the transceiver unit TXRU, and the transceiver unit performs analog beamforming on the OFDM signal received by the transceiver unit, that is, the logic is given by the precoding matrix. The weight of the OFDM signal on the port, the phase shifter is used to complete the adjustment of the antenna phase, and then the signal is transmitted.
请参见图3,图3是本申请实施例提供的回传参数传输的系统架构示意图。IAB分为移动终端MT(Mobile-Termination,MT)模块和分布单元DU(Distributed Unit,DU)模块:MT模块的功能被定义为一个类似UE的组件,可以理解为IAB节点通过MT接入到上级节点/网络。DU功能是相对于集中单元CU(Centralized Unit,CU)功能而言的。在5G NR中,基站功能被分为两部分,称为CU-DU分离。从协议栈角度,CU包括了原LTE基站的RRC层和PDCP层,DU包括了RLC层、MAC层和PHY物理层。在普通5G基站部署中,CU与DU物理上可以通过光纤连接,逻辑上存在一个专门定义的F1接口,用于CU与DU之间进行通信。从功能的角度,CU主要负责无线资源控制与配置,跨小区移动性管理,承载管理等;DU主要负责调度CU配置的资源,生成和发送物理信号。Referring to FIG. 3 , FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for backhaul parameter transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application. IAB is divided into a mobile terminal MT (Mobile-Termination, MT) module and a distributed unit DU (Distributed Unit, DU) module: The function of the MT module is defined as a UE-like component, which can be understood as the IAB node accesses the upper level through the MT Node/Network. The DU function is relative to the centralized unit CU (Centralized Unit, CU) function. In 5G NR, the base station function is divided into two parts called CU-DU separation. From the perspective of the protocol stack, the CU includes the RRC layer and the PDCP layer of the original LTE base station, and the DU includes the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the PHY physical layer. In the deployment of ordinary 5G base stations, CU and DU can be physically connected by optical fiber, and there is a specially defined F1 interface logically for communication between CU and DU. From a functional point of view, CU is mainly responsible for radio resource control and configuration, cross-cell mobility management, bearer management, etc.; DU is mainly responsible for scheduling resources configured by CU, and generating and sending physical signals.
如图3所示,第二节点是第一节点的上级节点,当第一节点使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号之前,第一节点的MT要向第二节点上报时分复用模式下的MIMO参数的数据包。第二节点的DU接收第一节点的MT上报的MIMO参数的数据包,并将所述MIMO参数的数据包通过F1接口发送给第二节点的CU。第二节点的CU根据MIMO参数配置一个与时分复用模式相对应的SRS resource set,然后将所述SRS resource set的数据包通过F1接口发送给第二节点的DU。第二节点的DU将第二节点的CU配置的所述SRS resource set的数据包通过空口(在移动通信网络中,空口为基站与移动终端之间的接口,手机或无线调制解调器与基站之间的接口)发送给第一节点的MT。第一节点的MT接收所述SRS resource set的数据包后,在第二节点的MT适配层进行处理,并将处理后的数据包转发给第二节点的DU模块进行处理,最终通过DU模块解析出所述SRS resource set的数据包。第二节点通过其DU模块向第一节点发送一个指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示第一节点向第二节点发送SRS信号。第一节点的MT接收所述指示信息后,将处理后的指示信息通过F1接口发送给第一节点的DU,对其进行解析。第一节点的MT根据解析后指示信息在所述SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向第二节点发送SRS信号。第二节点的DU接收所述SRS信号后,对所述SRS信号进行解析,将解析后的信息通过F1接口发送给所述第二节点的CU,所述第二节点的CU根据MIMO参数和SRS信号的信息生成控制信息,所述控制信息用于指示第一节点的MT选择相应的SRS resource,第二节点的DU将所述控制信息发送给第一节点的MT,第一节点的MT根据控制信息选择相应的SRS resource,并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵,向第二节点的DU传输信号。As shown in Figure 3, the second node is the upper-level node of the first node. Before the first node uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node, the MT of the first node should report the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the second node. the data package. The DU of the second node receives the data packet of the MIMO parameter reported by the MT of the first node, and sends the data packet of the MIMO parameter to the CU of the second node through the F1 interface. The CU of the second node configures an SRS resource set corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode according to the MIMO parameters, and then sends the data packet of the SRS resource set to the DU of the second node through the F1 interface. The DU of the second node passes the data packets of the SRS resource set configured by the CU of the second node through the air interface (in a mobile communication network, the air interface is the interface between the base station and the mobile terminal, and the communication between the mobile phone or the wireless modem and the base station is the interface between the base station and the mobile terminal. interface) to the MT of the first node. After the MT of the first node receives the data packet of the SRS resource set, it is processed at the MT adaptation layer of the second node, and the processed data packet is forwarded to the DU module of the second node for processing, and finally passes through the DU module. Parse out the data packet of the SRS resource set. The second node sends an indication message to the first node through its DU module, where the indication message is used to instruct the first node to send an SRS signal to the second node. After receiving the indication information, the MT of the first node sends the processed indication information to the DU of the first node through the F1 interface, and parses it. The MT of the first node selects a corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the parsed indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the second node according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. After receiving the SRS signal, the DU of the second node parses the SRS signal, and sends the parsed information to the CU of the second node through the F1 interface. The information of the signal generates control information, the control information is used to instruct the MT of the first node to select the corresponding SRS resource, the DU of the second node sends the control information to the MT of the first node, and the MT of the first node is based on the control The information selects the corresponding SRS resource, and transmits a signal to the DU of the second node according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource.
请参见图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图。在移动通信中,可以用若干个预编码矩阵构成一个码本,这一码本的内容,UE和gNB(基站)都是确知的。协议定义了多种码本,码本是多个预编码矩阵的集合,可以支持各种硬件条件的UE进行各种场景的上行传输。例如,UE的MIMO天线port之间的关系主要有三种,即:所有天线port都不相干(Non coherence),部分天线port相干(Partical coherence),全部天线port都相干(Full coherence)。如图5所示,图5列举了部分协议定义的码本,以及背后隐含对应的传输方案的关系。在图5中,若UE的MIMO天线port之间的关系为Non coherence,那么gNB只能选择TPMI为0的预编码矩阵;若UE的MIMO 天线port之间的关系为Partical coherence,那么gNB可以从TPMI为0~2中,选择适合UE MIMO上行链路传输数据的预编码矩阵;若UE的MIMO天线port之间的关系为Full coherence,那么gNB可以从TPMI为0~4中,选择适合UE MIMO上行链路传输数据的预编码矩阵。那么,当UE向gNB上报天线port之间的关系后,gNB即可确定相应的预编码矩阵的范围,从而缩小了gNB选择预编码矩阵的范围。Referring to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In mobile communication, several precoding matrices can be used to form a codebook, and the content of this codebook is known by both the UE and the gNB (base station). The protocol defines a variety of codebooks, and a codebook is a collection of multiple precoding matrices, which can support UEs with various hardware conditions to perform uplink transmission in various scenarios. For example, there are three main relationships between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE, namely: all antenna ports are non-coherent (Non coherence), some antenna ports are coherent (Partical coherence), and all antenna ports are coherent (Full coherence). As shown in FIG. 5 , FIG. 5 lists the codebooks defined by some protocols and the relationship of the corresponding transmission schemes implicitly behind them. In Figure 5, if the relationship between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE is Non coherence, then the gNB can only select a precoding matrix with TPMI 0; if the relationship between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE is Partical coherence, then the gNB can choose from If the TPMI is 0~2, the precoding matrix suitable for UE MIMO uplink transmission data is selected; if the relationship between the MIMO antenna ports of the UE is Full coherence, then the gNB can select the suitable UE MIMO from TPMI 0~4. Precoding matrix for uplink transmission data. Then, after the UE reports the relationship between the antenna ports to the gNB, the gNB can determine the range of the corresponding precoding matrix, thereby narrowing the range of the precoding matrix selected by the gNB.
当gNB接收到终端发送的SRS信号,便可估计上行信道,获取上行信道的信息,gNB基于上行信道的信息以及终端上报的MIMO参数便可为终端从码本中选择合适的预编码矩阵,并将预编码矩阵等相关信息发送给终端,终端根据gNB发送的信息的指示进行上行链路的数据的传输。如图4所示,UE的MIMO基于码本的方式进行上行链路传输的流程如下:When the gNB receives the SRS signal sent by the terminal, it can estimate the uplink channel and obtain the information of the uplink channel. Based on the information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the terminal, the gNB can select the appropriate precoding matrix from the codebook for the terminal, and Relevant information such as the precoding matrix is sent to the terminal, and the terminal performs uplink data transmission according to the instruction of the information sent by the gNB. As shown in Figure 4, the process of uplink transmission in UE's MIMO based on a codebook is as follows:
步骤S401:UE向gNB上报一套MIMO参数。Step S401: The UE reports a set of MIMO parameters to the gNB.
具体地,UE使用MIMO向gNB传输上行信号之前,要向gNB上报其MIMO参数。MIMO参数具体包括:天线的可用port的数量、天线port之间的关系以及可用面板等信息。通常,UE向gNB上报的MIMO参数是UE处于时分复用模式下的MIMO参数。UE向gNB上报MIMO参数,以便于让gNB知悉其MIMO的相关信息,并根据其MIMO参数为UE配置SRS资源,以及调度UE进行上行链路传输所需要的码本。Specifically, before the UE transmits the uplink signal to the gNB using MIMO, it needs to report its MIMO parameters to the gNB. The MIMO parameters specifically include: the number of available ports of the antenna, the relationship between the antenna ports, and information such as available panels. Generally, the MIMO parameters reported by the UE to the gNB are the MIMO parameters when the UE is in a time division multiplexing mode. The UE reports MIMO parameters to the gNB, so that the gNB can know its MIMO related information, configure SRS resources for the UE according to its MIMO parameters, and schedule the codebook required by the UE for uplink transmission.
步骤S402:gNB根据UE上报的MIMO参数,配置SRS资源,并将其配置的SRS资源发送给UE。Step S402: The gNB configures SRS resources according to the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and sends the configured SRS resources to the UE.
具体地,gNB接收到UE发送的MIMO参数后,为UE配置SRS资源。所述SRS资源为一个SRS resource set。所述SRS resource set是多个SRS resource的集合。由于UE设有多面板,或者波束赋形行后信号多方向传输,因此,在一个SRS resource set中可能有多个SRS resource。在物理意义的解释上,SRS resource set可视为一个功能单位,这个功能单位只能有一个使用目的,一个SRS resource set里面的多个SRS resource具有同样的使用目的。对于基于码本传输的方式中的SRS resource,一个SRS resource set里面的SRS resource配置的port数是相同的。当一个SRS resource set存在多个SRS resource时,会为每个SRS resource配置一个SRI,用于gNB指示UE应该使用哪个SRS resource。Specifically, after receiving the MIMO parameters sent by the UE, the gNB configures SRS resources for the UE. The SRS resource is an SRS resource set. The SRS resource set is a collection of multiple SRS resources. Since the UE has multiple panels, or the signals are transmitted in multiple directions after beamforming, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set. In terms of physical meaning, an SRS resource set can be regarded as a functional unit. This functional unit can only have one purpose of use. Multiple SRS resources in an SRS resource set have the same purpose of use. For the SRS resource in the codebook-based transmission method, the number of ports configured by the SRS resource in an SRS resource set is the same. When multiple SRS resources exist in an SRS resource set, an SRI is configured for each SRS resource, which is used by the gNB to indicate which SRS resource the UE should use.
此外,SRS resource实际上是一个被配置的时频资源。如图6所示,图6是本申请实施例提供的一种SRS资源结构图,当SRS resource set的使用目的为基于码本的上行传输时,最多只能配置两个SRS resource,每个SRS resource最多可配置4个天线port。在5G NR系统中,SRS resource的配置包括:In addition, the SRS resource is actually a configured time-frequency resource. As shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 6 is a structural diagram of an SRS resource provided by an embodiment of the present application. When the purpose of use of the SRS resource set is codebook-based uplink transmission, only two SRS resources can be configured at most. The resource can be configured with up to 4 antenna ports. In the 5G NR system, the configuration of the SRS resource includes:
(1)天线port数:NR SRS最多可以配置4个天线port;(1) Number of antenna ports: NR SRS can be configured with up to 4 antenna ports;
(2)OFDM符号数:NR SRS最多可以配置4个OFDM符号;(2) Number of OFDM symbols: NR SRS can be configured with up to 4 OFDM symbols;
(3)时域位置:NR SRS可以位于一个slot时隙中的最后6个符号中的连续1、2、4个连续符号;(3) Time domain location: NR SRS can be located in 1, 2, and 4 consecutive symbols in the last 6 symbols in a slot time slot;
(4)频域位置:NR SRS的频域位置与UE的部分带宽有关。(4) Frequency domain location: The frequency domain location of the NR SRS is related to the partial bandwidth of the UE.
步骤S403:gNB向UE发送指示信息。Step S403: the gNB sends indication information to the UE.
具体地,UE在向gNB发送SRS信号之前,会接收到gNB发送的一个指示信息,所述 指示信息包含一个或多个SRI。所述SRI的作用是指示UE使用SRS resource set中的某一个SRS resource。如步骤S402所述,由于UE波束赋形行后信号多方向传输、UE安装有多个面板,因此在一个SRS resource set中可能有多个SRS resource。当一个SRS resource set中可能有多个SRS resource时,gNB可能只发送一个SRI,用于指示UE调用所述SRI对应的SRS resource,所述UE基于所述SRS resource,向gNB发送探测信号;或者,gNB也可能发送多个SRI,用于指示UE调用所述多个SRI对应的多个SRS resource,所述UE基于所述多个SRS resource,分别向gNB发送SRS信号。Specifically, before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will receive an indication message sent by the gNB, where the indication message includes one or more SRIs. The role of the SRI is to instruct the UE to use a certain SRS resource in the SRS resource set. As described in step S402, since signals are transmitted in multiple directions after the UE beamforming, and the UE is installed with multiple panels, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set. When there may be multiple SRS resources in an SRS resource set, the gNB may only send one SRI to instruct the UE to call the SRS resource corresponding to the SRI, and the UE sends a sounding signal to the gNB based on the SRS resource; or , the gNB may also send multiple SRIs to instruct the UE to invoke multiple SRS resources corresponding to the multiple SRIs, and the UE sends SRS signals to the gNB respectively based on the multiple SRS resources.
步骤S404:UE接收gNB发送的指示信息,并使用所选的SRS资源向gNB发送SRS信号。Step S404: The UE receives the indication information sent by the gNB, and uses the selected SRS resource to send an SRS signal to the gNB.
具体地,UE接收到gNB发送的指示信息后,UE根据指示信息中的SRI在SRS resource set中选择相应的SRS resource,并基于SRS resource中的配置信息来向gNB发送SRS信号。如步骤S403中所述,指示信息中的SRI可能有一个,也可能有多个,当指示信息中存在多个SRI时,UE从SRS resource set中分别选择与所述SRI中对应的SRS resource,并基于所选的SRS resource中的配置信息,分别向gNB发送SRS信号,例如,根据所选的SRS resource中配置的port向gNB发送SRS信号。Specifically, after the UE receives the indication information sent by the gNB, the UE selects a corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the SRI in the indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB based on the configuration information in the SRS resource. As described in step S403, there may be one or multiple SRIs in the indication information. When there are multiple SRIs in the indication information, the UE selects the SRS resource corresponding to the SRI from the SRS resource set, respectively, And based on the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, the SRS signal is respectively sent to the gNB, for example, the SRS signal is sent to the gNB according to the port configured in the selected SRS resource.
步骤S405:gNB根据UE发送的SRS信号和MIMO参数,生成DCI信号,并将DCI信号发送给UE。Step S405: The gNB generates a DCI signal according to the SRS signal and MIMO parameters sent by the UE, and sends the DCI signal to the UE.
具体地,gNB根据UE发送的SRS信号,获取上行信道的状态信息,gNB通过分析所述上行信道的状态信息以及UE上报的MIMO参数,从码本中选择适合UE MIMO上行链路传输数据的预编码矩阵。根据UE发送的多路SRS信号(UE选择的SRS resource中可能配置了多个port),确定调用UE的port的数量Rank。另外,当gNB发送的指示信息中包含多个SRI时,gNB会收到多路SRS信号,在这种情况下,gNB也会根据上行信道的状态信息以及UE上报的MIMO参数选择适合所述UE MIMO上行链路传输数据的SRS resource。Specifically, the gNB obtains the status information of the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the UE, and the gNB selects a prediction suitable for the UE MIMO uplink transmission data from the codebook by analyzing the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE. encoding matrix. According to the multi-channel SRS signal sent by the UE (multiple ports may be configured in the SRS resource selected by the UE), the number Rank of the ports that call the UE is determined. In addition, when the indication information sent by the gNB contains multiple SRIs, the gNB will receive multiple SRS signals. In this case, the gNB will also select a suitable UE based on the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE. SRS resource for MIMO uplink transmission data.
所述gNB将其选择的预编码矩阵的TPMI、Rank的指示信息RI以及SRS resource的SRI等信息通过DCI信号发送给所述UE。其中TPMI用于指示UE使用gNB选择的预编码矩阵,RI用来指示UE使用哪些port传输SRS信号,SRI用于指示UE调用gNB选择的SRS resource。The gNB sends information such as the TPMI of the selected precoding matrix, the indication information RI of the Rank, and the SRI of the SRS resource to the UE through a DCI signal. The TPMI is used to instruct the UE to use the precoding matrix selected by the gNB, the RI is used to indicate which ports the UE uses to transmit the SRS signal, and the SRI is used to instruct the UE to invoke the SRS resource selected by the gNB.
步骤S406:UE接收DCI信号,并基于所述DCI信号,使用MIMO通过上行链路传输信号。Step S406: The UE receives the DCI signal, and transmits the signal through the uplink using MIMO based on the DCI signal.
具体地,UE接收DCI信号后,通过DCI信号中的信息,进行上行链路信号的传输,具体过程如下:UE通过DCI信号中的SRI在SRS resource set中选择相应的SRS resource;通过DCI信号中的TPMI在码本选择相应的预编码矩阵。UE通过其选择的预编码矩阵赋予其待发送的信号相应的权值,并基于SRS resource中的配置信息(如配置的port)向gNB发送信号。Specifically, after the UE receives the DCI signal, it transmits the uplink signal through the information in the DCI signal. The specific process is as follows: the UE selects the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set through the SRI in the DCI signal; The TPMI selects the corresponding precoding matrix in the codebook. The UE assigns the corresponding weight to the signal to be sent by the precoding matrix it selects, and sends the signal to the gNB based on the configuration information (such as the configured port) in the SRS resource.
本实施例介绍了MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法,UE首先向gNB上报其时分复用模式下对应的MIMO参数,以便gNB根据其上报的MIMO参数配置相应的SRS资源, 即:gNB配置一个SRS resource set,一个SRS resource set里面有一个或多个功能相同的SRS resource。gNB将配置的SRS resource set发送给UE,然后会发送一个指示信息,用于让UE向gNB发送SRS信号。UE接收到所述指示信息后,根据所述指示信息中的SRI从SRS resource set中选择相应的SRS resource,并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向gNB发送SRS信号。gNB通过SRS信号可以获取上行信道的信息,并基于上行信道的信息和UE上报的MIMO参数为UE从码本中选择合适的预编码矩阵,确定Rank,以及SRI等信息,并将这些信息通过DCI信号下行发送给UE。UE在接收到DCI信号后根据其中的TPMI、SRI等信息,向gNB发送信号。UE使用MIMO通过码本的方式传输上行信号,可以减轻信号在上行链路传输过程受到的干扰所带来的影响,大大提高了MIMO系统容量。This embodiment introduces a MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method. The UE first reports its corresponding MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the gNB, so that the gNB configures the corresponding SRS resources according to the reported MIMO parameters, that is, the gNB configuration An SRS resource set, an SRS resource set contains one or more SRS resources with the same function. The gNB sends the configured SRS resource set to the UE, and then sends an indication message for the UE to send the SRS signal to the gNB. After receiving the indication information, the UE selects a corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set according to the SRI in the indication information, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. The gNB can obtain the information of the uplink channel through the SRS signal, and select the appropriate precoding matrix from the codebook for the UE based on the information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, determine the Rank, and SRI and other information, and pass this information through the DCI The signal is sent downlink to the UE. After receiving the DCI signal, the UE sends the signal to the gNB according to the TPMI, SRI and other information therein. The UE uses MIMO to transmit uplink signals by means of a codebook, which can reduce the influence of interference caused by the signals in the uplink transmission process, and greatly improve the capacity of the MIMO system.
请参见图7,图7是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO基于非码本的上行链路传输流程图。MIMO基于非码本的上行传输的方法为:UE不再根据协议定义的码本进行上行链路信号的传输,而是依据相关的CSI-RS来计算出预编码矩阵,从而调整上行信道的权值。如图7所示,UE使用MIMO基于非码本方式进行上行链路传输的流程如下:Referring to FIG. 7 , FIG. 7 is a flowchart of MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method of MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission is: UE no longer transmits uplink signals according to the codebook defined by the protocol, but calculates the precoding matrix according to the relevant CSI-RS, so as to adjust the weight of the uplink channel. value. As shown in Figure 7, the process of using MIMO for the UE to perform uplink transmission based on the non-codebook mode is as follows:
步骤S701:UE向gNB上报一套MIMO参数。Step S701: The UE reports a set of MIMO parameters to the gNB.
具体地,UE使用MIMO通过非码本的方式向gNB传输信号之前,要向gNB上报其在时分复用模式下对应的MIMO参数。MIMO参数具体包括:天线的可用port的数量、天线port之间的关系以及可用面板等信息。UE通过向gNB传输MIMO参数,以便于让gNB了解UE的MIMO参数相关信息,然后为UE配置相关的SRS资源。Specifically, before using MIMO to transmit signals to the gNB in a non-codebook manner, the UE shall report its corresponding MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the gNB. The MIMO parameters specifically include: the number of available ports of the antenna, the relationship between the antenna ports, and information such as available panels. The UE transmits the MIMO parameters to the gNB so that the gNB can know the relevant information of the MIMO parameters of the UE, and then configures the relevant SRS resources for the UE.
步骤S702:gNB根据UE上报的MIMO参数,配置SRS资源和CSI-RS信号,并将其配置的SRS资源和CSI-RS信号发送给UE。Step S702: The gNB configures SRS resources and CSI-RS signals according to the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and sends the configured SRS resources and CSI-RS signals to the UE.
gNB接收到UE发送的MIMO参数后,为UE配置SRS资源。所述SRS资源为一个SRS resource set。所述SRS resource set是多个SRS resource的集合。由于UE设有多面板,或者波束赋形行后信号多方向传输,因此,在一个SRS resource set中可能有多个SRS resource。在物理意义的解释上,SRS resource set可视为一个功能单位,这个功能单位只能有一个使用目的,一个SRS resource set里面的多个SRS resource具有同样的使用目的。当SRS resource set的使用目的为基于非码本的上行传输时,一个SRS resource set内最多包含四个SRS resource,每个SRS resource只能配置1个port。gNB以SRS resource set为单位,配置对应的CSI-RS信号。所述CSI-RS信号的作用是,用来让UE估计下行信道。当一个SRS resource set存在多个SRS resource时,会为每个SRS resource配置一个SRI,用于gNB指示UE应该使用哪个SRS resource。After receiving the MIMO parameters sent by the UE, the gNB configures SRS resources for the UE. The SRS resource is an SRS resource set. The SRS resource set is a collection of multiple SRS resources. Since the UE has multiple panels, or the signals are transmitted in multiple directions after beamforming, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set. In terms of physical meaning, an SRS resource set can be regarded as a functional unit. This functional unit can only have one purpose of use. Multiple SRS resources in an SRS resource set have the same purpose of use. When the SRS resource set is used for non-codebook-based uplink transmission, one SRS resource set contains at most four SRS resources, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port. The gNB uses the SRS resource set as the unit to configure the corresponding CSI-RS signal. The role of the CSI-RS signal is to allow the UE to estimate the downlink channel. When multiple SRS resources exist in an SRS resource set, an SRI is configured for each SRS resource, which is used by the gNB to indicate which SRS resource the UE should use.
gNB将其配置SRS resource和CSI-RS发送给UE。The gNB sends its configured SRS resource and CSI-RS to the UE.
步骤S703:gNB向UE发送指示信息。Step S703: the gNB sends indication information to the UE.
具体地,UE在向gNB发送SRS信号之前,会接收到gNB发送的一个指示信息,所述指示信息包含所述SRS resource set中全部SRS resource对应的SRI。所述SRI的作用是指示UE使用SRS resource set中的SRS resource。如步骤S702所述,由于UE波束赋形行后信号多方向传输、UE安装有多个面板,因此在一个SRS resource set中可能有多个SRS resource。Specifically, before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will receive an indication message sent by the gNB, and the indication message includes the SRI corresponding to all the SRS resources in the SRS resource set. The role of the SRI is to instruct the UE to use the SRS resource in the SRS resource set. As described in step S702, since signals are transmitted in multiple directions after the UE beamforming, and the UE is installed with multiple panels, there may be multiple SRS resources in one SRS resource set.
步骤S704:UE根据收到的CSI-RS信号估计下行信道,得到下行信道矩阵,并根据下行信道矩阵确定上行信道矩阵的信息,将所述上行信道矩阵经过运算处理得到一个预编码矩阵H。Step S704: The UE estimates the downlink channel according to the received CSI-RS signal, obtains the downlink channel matrix, determines the information of the uplink channel matrix according to the downlink channel matrix, and obtains a precoding matrix H by performing operation processing on the uplink channel matrix.
具体地,UE接收到CSI-RS信号后,估计下行信道,并获得下行信道的信息,根据其所获得的下行信道的信息得到一个下行信道矩阵,具体过程为:假设gNB通过四个port AP0~AP3向UE发送CSI-RS信号,在UE端有四个天线port BP0~BP3接收所述CSI-RS信号。那么可以得到一个4x4的下行信道矩阵:Specifically, after receiving the CSI-RS signal, the UE estimates the downlink channel, obtains the information of the downlink channel, and obtains a downlink channel matrix according to the obtained information of the downlink channel. AP3 sends a CSI-RS signal to the UE, and there are four antenna ports BP0-BP3 on the UE side to receive the CSI-RS signal. Then a 4x4 downlink channel matrix can be obtained:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000001
得到下行信道矩阵后,UE可根据得到的下行信道矩阵得到上行信道矩阵,假设上行信道矩阵和下行信道矩阵为转置关系,即:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000002
则上行信道矩阵为:
After obtaining the downlink channel matrix, the UE can obtain the uplink channel matrix according to the obtained downlink channel matrix. It is assumed that the uplink channel matrix and the downlink channel matrix are in a transposed relationship, that is:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000002
Then the upstream channel matrix is:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000003
UE将上行信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000004
经过运算处理,例如特征值分解(SVD分解)等方式,计算出UE上行发送SRS的权值,获得一个预编码矩阵H,SRS权值的计算过程如下:
The UE converts the uplink channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000004
After arithmetic processing, such as eigenvalue decomposition (SVD decomposition), the weight of the SRS sent by the UE uplink is calculated, and a precoding matrix H is obtained. The calculation process of the SRS weight is as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000005
上述预编码矩阵中的每个元素表示SRS上行传输时的权值,以元素d 12为例,d 12表示若UE的port1向gNB发送SRS,gNB的port2接收SRS,在发送SRS时UE赋予所述SRS的权值为d 12Each element in the above precoding matrix represents the weight of the SRS uplink transmission. Taking element d 12 as an example, d 12 represents that if port1 of the UE sends SRS to the gNB, port2 of the gNB receives the SRS, and the UE gives the SRS when sending the SRS. The weight of the SRS is d 12 .
步骤S705:UE接收gNB发送的指示信息,并基于SRS资源和预编码矩阵H向gNB发送SRS信号。Step S705: The UE receives the indication information sent by the gNB, and sends an SRS signal to the gNB based on the SRS resource and the precoding matrix H.
具体地,UE接收到gNB发送的指示信息后,根据指示信息UE的SRI选择在SRS resource set中选择相应的SRS resource,并基于SRS resource中的配置port,分别向gNB发送SRS信号。此外,在向gNB发送SRS信号之前,UE会基于预编码矩阵H赋予待发送的SRS信号相应的权值。Specifically, after receiving the indication information sent by the gNB, the UE selects the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource set according to the SRI of the UE in the indication information, and sends the SRS signal to the gNB respectively based on the configuration port in the SRS resource. In addition, before sending the SRS signal to the gNB, the UE will assign a corresponding weight to the SRS signal to be sent based on the precoding matrix H.
步骤S706:gNB基于UE发送的SRS信号和MIMO参数,生成DCI信号,并将DCI 信号发送给UE。Step S706: The gNB generates a DCI signal based on the SRS signal and MIMO parameters sent by the UE, and sends the DCI signal to the UE.
具体地,gNB根据UE发送的多路SRS信号,获取上行信道的状态信息,gNB通过分析所述上行信道的状态信息以及UE上报的MIMO参数,确定不相干的多路SRS信号,计算MIMO信道矩阵的秩Rank(信道矩阵的秩表示UE向gNB发送的多路信号中,不相干信号的数目),根据上行信道的状态,确定调用UE的DMRS port的数目。在本实施例中,发送SRS的天线1对应的信道不理想,噪声大或者干扰大,不适合进行上行传输,所以,gNB只调度了port 0,2,3,即SRI=0、2、3;DMRS port indictor=0、2、3。此时,UE调用的预编码矩阵为:Specifically, the gNB obtains the status information of the uplink channel according to the multi-channel SRS signals sent by the UE, and the gNB determines the incoherent multi-channel SRS signals by analyzing the status information of the uplink channel and the MIMO parameters reported by the UE, and calculates the MIMO channel matrix (The rank of the channel matrix represents the number of incoherent signals in the multi-channel signals sent by the UE to the gNB), and the number of DMRS ports to call the UE is determined according to the status of the uplink channel. In this embodiment, the channel corresponding to the antenna 1 that transmits the SRS is not ideal, the noise or interference is large, and it is not suitable for uplink transmission. Therefore, the gNB only schedules ports 0, 2, and 3, that is, SRI=0, 2, 3 ; DMRS port indicator = 0, 2, 3. At this point, the precoding matrix invoked by the UE is:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000006
所述gNB将信道矩阵的秩的RI以及SRS resource的RI、DMRS port indictor等信息通过DCI信号发送给所述UE。其中,RI用来指示MIMO信道的有效的数据层数,SRI用于指示UE调用gNB选择的SRS resource,DMRS port indictor用来指示DMRS port。The gNB sends the RI of the rank of the channel matrix, the RI of the SRS resource, the DMRS port indictor and other information to the UE through a DCI signal. Among them, RI is used to indicate the effective data layer number of the MIMO channel, SRI is used to indicate that the UE invokes the SRS resource selected by the gNB, and the DMRS port indicator is used to indicate the DMRS port.
步骤S707:UE接收DCI信号,并根据所述DCI信号和预编码矩阵H,使用MIMO通过上行链路传输信号。Step S707: The UE receives the DCI signal, and transmits the signal through the uplink using MIMO according to the DCI signal and the precoding matrix H.
具体地,UE接收DCI信号后,通过DCI信号中的信息,使用预编码矩阵和对应的port给gUE发送上行信号。Specifically, after receiving the DCI signal, the UE sends an uplink signal to the gUE by using the information in the DCI signal and using the precoding matrix and the corresponding port.
本实施例,UE使用MIMO向gNB发送上行信号之前,要向gNB上报其MIMO参数。gNB根据上报的MIMO参数为UE配置对应的SRS资源和CSI-RS信号。与MIMO基于码本传输的方式不同,在基于非码本的方式进行上行链路信号的传输,UE设备需要根据gNB配置的CSI-RS信号来估计下行信道,根据下行信道与上行信道之间的关系来确定上行信道,得到上行信道的信道矩阵的信息,根据上行信道的信道矩阵计算出预编码矩阵。UE在接收到gNB的指示信息后,选择指示信息所指示的SRS resource,基于预编码矩阵赋予待发送的SRS信号对应的权值,基于所选的SRS resource中配置的port等信息,将已加权的SRS信号发送给gNB。gNB通过SRS信号获取上行信道的信息,基于上行信道的信息和MIMO参数调用UE的天线port,并将SRI、RI以及DMRS port indictor等信息通过DCI信号发送给UE。UE通过DCI信号中的指示,通过MIMO进行上行链路信号的传输。MIMO基于非码本进行上行链路信号传输的方式,UE可以依据CSI-RS信号得到预编码矩阵,给予了UE很大的灵活度。In this embodiment, before using MIMO to send an uplink signal to the gNB, the UE needs to report its MIMO parameters to the gNB. The gNB configures corresponding SRS resources and CSI-RS signals for the UE according to the reported MIMO parameters. Different from the codebook-based transmission method of MIMO, in the non-codebook-based method for uplink signal transmission, the UE needs to estimate the downlink channel according to the CSI-RS signal configured by the gNB, and according to the difference between the downlink channel and the uplink channel. The uplink channel is determined by the relationship, the information of the channel matrix of the uplink channel is obtained, and the precoding matrix is calculated according to the channel matrix of the uplink channel. After receiving the indication information of the gNB, the UE selects the SRS resource indicated by the indication information, assigns the corresponding weight to the SRS signal to be sent based on the precoding matrix, and assigns the weighted value based on the port and other information configured in the selected SRS resource. The SRS signal is sent to the gNB. The gNB obtains the information of the uplink channel through the SRS signal, calls the antenna port of the UE based on the information of the uplink channel and MIMO parameters, and sends the information such as SRI, RI, and DMRS port indicator to the UE through the DCI signal. The UE transmits the uplink signal through MIMO through the indication in the DCI signal. MIMO performs uplink signal transmission based on a non-codebook, and the UE can obtain a precoding matrix according to the CSI-RS signal, which gives the UE great flexibility.
相较于图4和图7的实施例,UE使用MIMO向网络设备传输信号前,只能向网络设备上报一套MIMO参数,本申请实施例提供了另外一种MIMO上行链路的信号传输的方法, 如图8所示,图8是本实施例提供的一种MIMO上行链路的信号传输系统架构图。该系统架构中包括网络设备、第一节点、第二节点以及两个终端设备UE,其中第一节点和第二节点可以为IAB中继节点,第二节点为第一节点的上级节点。图8以列举两个IAB中继节点,以及两个UE为例进行说明。下面本实施例以网络设备为基站、第一节点为IAB节点1、第二节点为IAB节点2来进行举例说明。Compared with the embodiments in FIG. 4 and FIG. 7 , before the UE transmits signals to the network device using MIMO, it can only report one set of MIMO parameters to the network device. The embodiment of the present application provides another method of MIMO uplink signal transmission. The method is shown in FIG. 8 , which is an architectural diagram of a MIMO uplink signal transmission system provided in this embodiment. The system architecture includes a network device, a first node, a second node, and two terminal devices UE, wherein the first node and the second node may be an IAB relay node, and the second node is an upper-level node of the first node. FIG. 8 takes two IAB relay nodes and two UEs as examples for description. In the following, this embodiment is described by taking the network device as the base station, the first node as the IAB node 1, and the second node as the IAB node 2 as an example.
IAB节点1使用MIMO技术向其上级节点IAB节点1进行上行链路的信号传输的流程如下:The process of IAB node 1 using the MIMO technology to perform uplink signal transmission to its superior node IAB node 1 is as follows:
1、IAB节点2用MIMO进行上行链路信号传输之前,向基站分别上报多套不同工作模式下的MIMO参数。1. Before the IAB node 2 uses MIMO for uplink signal transmission, it reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station respectively.
2、基站根据其接收到的多套MIMO参数,配置第一资源集,并将所配置第一资源集发送给IAB节点1;基站还将其配置的第一资源集的相关信息和/或IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息发送给IAB节点2。2. The base station configures the first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters it receives, and sends the configured first resource set to the IAB node 1; the base station also configures the related information of the first resource set and/or the IAB The information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the node 1 is sent to the IAB node 2.
3、IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送指示信息,用于指示IAB节点1向其发送SRS信号。3. The IAB node 2 sends indication information to the IAB node 1 to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to it.
4、IAB节点1发送的状态信息从第一资源集中选择对应的SRS资源,并根据所述指示信息从所选的SRS资源中选择对应的SRS resource,然后并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。4. The state information sent by the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the first resource set, and selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the indication information, and then according to the configuration in the selected SRS resource The information sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 2.
5、IAB节点2根据IAB节点1发送的SRS信号和IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息,生成DCI信号,用于指示IAB节点1使用MIMO向IAB节点2传输信号。5. The IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal according to the SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1 and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, which is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to transmit signals to the IAB node 2 using MIMO.
6、IAB节点1接收DCI信号,并根据所述DCI信号中的指示信息,使用MIMO向IAB节点2传输信号。6. The IAB node 1 receives the DCI signal, and uses MIMO to transmit the signal to the IAB node 2 according to the indication information in the DCI signal.
本实施例,当下级IAB节点向上级IAB节点通过MIMO传输信号之前,要先向基站分别上报多套在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,基站根据上报的多套MIMO参数分别配置对应的SRS资源,然后将SRS资源发送给下级IAB节点。当下级IAB节点向上级IAB节点要通过MIMO传输信号时,下级IAB节点可以根据其当前所处的不同工作模式来选择相应的SRS资源,并基于所选的SRS资源来进行信号的传输;或者上级IAB节点需要调度下级IAB节点通过MIMO进行上行传输时,上级IAB节点可以根据其当前所处的不同工作模式来生成DCI信号,并指示下级IAB节点进行MIMO传输的参数。In this embodiment, before the lower-level IAB node transmits signals to the upper-level IAB node through MIMO, it must first report multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station, and the base station configures corresponding SRS resources according to the reported multiple sets of MIMO parameters. The SRS resource is then sent to the subordinate IAB node. When the lower-level IAB node wants to transmit a signal to the upper-level IAB node through MIMO, the lower-level IAB node can select the corresponding SRS resource according to the different working modes it is currently in, and transmit the signal based on the selected SRS resource; When the IAB node needs to schedule the lower-level IAB node to perform uplink transmission through MIMO, the upper-level IAB node can generate a DCI signal according to the different working modes it is currently in, and instruct the lower-level IAB node to perform MIMO transmission parameters.
本实施例中的IAB节点的结构如图9所示,图9是本申请实施例提供的一种IAB节点设备的结构图。如图9所示,IAB节点设备包括DU和MT两个功能模块,其中MT是IAB节点设备的UE功能模块,即IAB节点通过MT与上级节点进行通信。DU是IAB节点的基站功能模块,即:IAB节点通过DU与下级节点和UE进行通信。IAB节点的DU和MT模块均具有完整的接收和发送的模块,而且两者之间具有接口。值得注意的是,MT与DU均为逻辑模块,在实际中,两者可以共享部分子模块,例如,可以共用收发天线、基带处理模块等。The structure of the IAB node in this embodiment is shown in FIG. 9 , which is a structural diagram of an IAB node device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9 , the IAB node device includes two functional modules, DU and MT, where the MT is the UE functional module of the IAB node device, that is, the IAB node communicates with the upper-level node through the MT. The DU is the base station functional module of the IAB node, that is, the IAB node communicates with the subordinate nodes and the UE through the DU. Both the DU and MT modules of the IAB node have complete modules for receiving and sending, and there is an interface between them. It is worth noting that both MT and DU are logical modules, and in practice, they can share some sub-modules, for example, can share transceiver antennas, baseband processing modules, and so on.
请参见图10,图10是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图。第一节点向第二节点通过MIMO传输信号之前,先向网络设备分别发送不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,网络设备根据其接收到的多套MIMO参数,配置第一资源集,所 述第一资源集中包括多个SRS资源。网络设备将所述第一资源集发送给第一节点,然后,第一节点选择相应的SRS resource和预编码矩阵,根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号。图10以第一节点为IAB节点1,第二节点为IAB节点2,网络设备为基站为例,如图10所示,另一种MIMO基于码本的方式进行上行链路传输的流程如下:Referring to FIG. 10, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Before the first node transmits signals to the second node through MIMO, it first transmits MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, and the network device configures a first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters received by the network device. A set includes multiple SRS resources. The network device sends the first resource set to the first node, and then the first node selects the corresponding SRS resource and precoding matrix, and uses MIMO to the second node according to the configuration information and precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource. Transmission signal. Figure 10 takes the first node as IAB node 1, the second node as IAB node 2, and the network device as a base station as an example, as shown in Figure 10, another MIMO codebook-based method for uplink transmission is as follows:
步骤S1001:IAB节点1将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给基站。Step S1001: The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
具体地,IAB节点1向IAB节点2用MIMO传输信号之前,IAB节点1的MT要先向基站发送多套MIMO参数,多套MIMO参数分别对应不同的工作模式。其中,所述不同工作模式包括全双工模式(FD)、时分复用模式(TDM)和空分复用模式(SDM)。发送的多套MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系为显式关系或者隐式关系。IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系为显式时,协议规定不同工作模式对应的MIMO参数信息,IAB节点1向基站上报的多套MIMO参数分别带有不同工作模式的标识,当基站接收到IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数后,通过标识便可知道MIMO参数对应的是哪个不同工作模式。IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系为隐式时,基站通过IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数中的信息(可用port数、port之间的关系以及可用面板数等信息)与不同工作模式之间的关系,来确定MIMO参数对应的不同工作模式,例如:当IAB节点1的MT上报的其中一套MIMO参数的可用port数的数量为4,port之间关系为部分相关,那么根据协议的规定,便可判断这套MIMO参数对应的模式为非全双工模式;若传输的另一套MIMO参数的可用port数为4,port之间的关系为全相关,且面板1不可用,那么,根据协议规定,便可判断这套MIMO参数对应的模式是全双工模式和/或空分复用模式。Specifically, before the IAB node 1 transmits a signal to the IAB node 2 using MIMO, the MT of the IAB node 1 first sends multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes respectively. Wherein, the different working modes include full duplex mode (FD), time division multiplexing mode (TDM) and space division multiplexing mode (SDM). The relationship between the sent multiple sets of MIMO parameters and different working modes is an explicit relationship or an implicit relationship. When the relationship between the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 and the different working modes is explicit, the protocol specifies the MIMO parameter information corresponding to the different working modes, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station have different The identification of the working mode, when the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1, it can know which different working mode the MIMO parameters correspond to through the identification. When the relationship between the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 and different working modes is implicit, the information in the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 (the number of available ports, the relationship between ports and the number of available panels) and the relationship between different working modes to determine different working modes corresponding to MIMO parameters, for example: when the number of available ports for one set of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 is 4, The relationship between ports is partial correlation, then according to the provisions of the protocol, it can be judged that the mode corresponding to this set of MIMO parameters is not full-duplex mode; if the number of available ports of another set of MIMO parameters transmitted is 4, the If the relationship is full correlation, and panel 1 is unavailable, then, according to the protocol, it can be determined that the mode corresponding to this set of MIMO parameters is the full-duplex mode and/or the space-division multiplexing mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1的MT向基站上报的多套MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系为显式关系时,IAB节点1的MT分别向基站上报多套MIMO参数的方式有2种,即:IAB节点1的MT分别上报时分复用模式下的MIMO参数和非时分复用模式下的MIMO参数;IAB节点1的MT分别上报时分复用模式下的MIMO参数、空分复用模式下的MIMO参数和全双工模式下的MIMO参数。In a possible implementation manner, when the relationship between multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB node 1 to the base station and different working modes is an explicit relationship, the MT of IAB node 1 reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. There are two ways, namely: the MT of IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode and the MIMO parameters in the non-time division multiplexing mode respectively; the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode, MIMO parameters in space division multiplexing mode and MIMO parameters in full duplex mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB2的MT向基站上报的多套MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系为隐式关系时,IAB节点1的MT分别向基站上报多套MIMO参数的方式有2种,即:IAB节点1的MT分别上报与时分复用模式、空分复用模式以及全双工模式具有隐式关系的MIMO参数;IAB节点1的MT分别上报协议定义的受限和非受限的两种传输模式对应的MIMO参数。其中,非受限传输模式对应的MIMO参数与时分复用模式的关系为隐式的,受限传输模式对应的MIMO参数与非时分复用模式的关系为隐式的。In a possible implementation manner, when the relationship between multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of IAB2 to the base station and different working modes is an implicit relationship, the MT of IAB node 1 reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. There are two types, namely: the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the MIMO parameters that are implicitly related to the time-division multiplexing mode, the space-division multiplexing mode and the full-duplex mode; the MT of the IAB node 1 reports the restricted and MIMO parameters corresponding to the two unrestricted transmission modes. The relationship between the MIMO parameters corresponding to the unrestricted transmission mode and the time division multiplexing mode is implicit, and the relationship between the MIMO parameters corresponding to the restricted transmission mode and the non-time division multiplexing mode is implicit.
步骤S1002:基站接收IAB节点1上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,并根据所述MIMO参数配置第一资源集,并将所述第一资源集发送给所述IAB节点1;将所述第一资源集的信息和MIMO参数信息发送给IAB节点2。Step S1002: the base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1; The information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
具体地,基站接收到IAB节点1的MT发送的多套MIMO参数后,无论所述MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系是隐式还是显式的,基站根据所述MIMO参数中的信息,配置第一资源集。Specifically, after the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters sent by the MT of IAB node 1, no matter whether the relationship between the MIMO parameters and different working modes is implicit or explicit, the base station, according to the information in the MIMO parameters, Configure the first resource set.
在一种可能实现的方式中,基站根据IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数配置的第一资源集包含多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为SRS resource set,多个SRS resource set与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,所述多个SRS resource set为基站配置的、与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点1的MT分别上报与全双工模式、时分复用模式以及空分复用模式具有显式或隐式关系的MIMO参数,基站会分别配置这三个不同工作模式的SRS resource set。其中,同一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource的功能相同,即:若在同一个SRS resource set中存在多个SRS resource,那么这多个SRS resource配置的port数相同,且port之间的关系也相同(相干、部分相干、全相干)。In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is an SRS resource set, The multiple SRS resource sets are respectively corresponding to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes, and the multiple SRS resource sets are the SRS resources configured by the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively. For example, if the MT of IAB node 1 reports MIMO parameters that have an explicit or implicit relationship with the full-duplex mode, time-division multiplexing mode, and space-division multiplexing mode, the base station will configure the SRS resources of these three different working modes respectively. set. Among them, the functions of SRS resources in the same SRS resource set are the same, that is: if there are multiple SRS resources in the same SRS resource set, then the number of ports configured by these multiple SRS resources is the same, and the relationship between ports is also Identical (coherent, partially coherent, fully coherent).
基站在配置多个SRS resource set时,会给每个SRS resource set配置标识,配置标识的方式主要有以下三种:第一种方式为,基站显式地配置SRS resource set与不同工作模式之间的关系,即:在SRS resource set中新增字段{SDM}用于指示该SRS resource set对应的是空分复用模式下的SRS资源,通过新增字段的方法,来显式指示SRS resource set的功能;第二种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource set进行编号(从0开始),且指定一个协议规定每个编号所对应的功能,其中,所述协议是基站和IAB节点所确知的,例如:协议规定编号为0的SRS resource set是用于TDM传输的SRS resource set;第三种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource set进行编号(从0开始),当IAB节点2向IAB节点1的MT发送指示信息时,会向IAB节点1的MT发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示SRS resource set的编号对应的不同工作模式;其中,所述第三指示信息是根据基站向IAB节点2发送的所述编号对应不同工作模式的信息生成的。通过上述第一种和第二种方式,当IAB节点1的MT收到SRS resource set时,会通过其中的标识知道SRS resource set是对应哪个不同工作模式配置的;通过上述第三种方式,基站对其SRS resource set仅进行编号,用于区分SRS resource set。When the base station configures multiple SRS resource sets, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource set. There are three main ways to configure the identifier. relationship, that is: the new field {SDM} in the SRS resource set is used to indicate that the SRS resource set corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the SRS resource set is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field. The second method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node. For example, the protocol stipulates that the SRS resource set numbered 0 is the SRS resource set used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the IAB When the MT of the node 1 sends the indication information, it will send the third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, and the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the numbers of the SRS resource set; wherein, the third indication information It is generated according to the information that the numbers correspond to different working modes sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 . Through the first and second methods above, when the MT of IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource set, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource set corresponds to through the identifier in it; through the third method above, the base station The SRS resource set is only numbered to distinguish the SRS resource set.
基站将其配置的第一资源集,即配置的多个SRS resource set发送给IAB节点1,并将所述多个SRS resource set的信息和IAB节点1上报的MIMO参数信息发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured multiple SRS resource sets to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the multiple SRS resource sets and the MIMO parameter information reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站根据IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数配置的第一资源集包含一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为SRS resource set,在所述SRS resource set中有多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源为多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,所述多个SRS resource为基站配置的、与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS资源。其中,允许一个或多个SRS resource对应一种工作模式。In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is the SRS resource set. There are multiple reference signal resources in the SRS resource set, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, the multiple SRS resources correspond to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes, and the multiple SRS resources SRS resources configured for the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively. Among them, one or more SRS resources are allowed to correspond to a working mode.
基站在配置多个SRS resource时,会给每个SRS resource配置标识,配置标识的方式主要有以下三种:第一种方式为,基站显式地配置SRS resource与不同工作模式之间的关系,例如,在SRS resource中新增字段{SDM}用于指示该SRS resource对应的是空分复用模式下的SRS资源,通过新增字段的方法,来显式指示SRS resource的功能;第二种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource进行编号(从0开始),且指定一个协议规定每个编号所对应的功能,其中,所述协议是基站和IAB节点所确知的,例如:协议规定编号为0的SRS resource是用于TDM传输的SRS resource;第三种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource进 行编号(从0开始),当IAB节点2向IAB节点1的MT发送指示信息时,会向IAB节点1的MT额外第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示SRS resource的编号对应的不同工作模式;其中,所述第三指示信息是根据基站向IAB节点2发送的编号对应不同工作模式的信息生成的。通过上述第一种和第二种方式,当IAB节点1的MT收到SRS resource时,会通过其中的标识知道SRS resource是对应哪个不同工作模式配置的;通过上述第三种方式,基站对其SRS resource仅进行编号,用于区分SRS resource。When the base station configures multiple SRS resources, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource. There are mainly three ways to configure the identifier. The first method is that the base station explicitly configures the relationship between the SRS resource and different working modes. For example, a new field {SDM} is added in the SRS resource to indicate that the SRS resource corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the function of the SRS resource is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field; the second The method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resources (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node, for example: the protocol specifies the number The SRS resource of 0 is the SRS resource used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the instruction information to the MT of the IAB node 1, it will Additional third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the number of the SRS resource; wherein, the third indication information is corresponding to the number sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 generated from the information of different working modes. Through the first and second methods above, when the MT of the IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource is configured for through the identifier; SRS resources are only numbered to distinguish SRS resources.
基站将其配置好的第一资源集发送给IAB节点1,并将所述第一资源集的信息和IAB节点1上传的多套MIMO参数的信息发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the first resource set and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站接收IAB节点1上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数后,不会立即为其配置SRS资源,只有当基站接收IAB节点1发送的SRS资源配置请求信令后,基站为其配置SRS资源。为了便于本领域技术人员理解所述SRS资源配置请求信令,本实施例对其进行举例说明。例如,IAB节点1分别向基站发送了5套MIMO参数,若IAB节点1需要基站配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS资源时,IAB节点1会向基站发送SRS资源配置请求信令,在所述SRS资源配置请求信令中包含配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS资源的请求,基站在收到所述SRS资源配置请求信令后,会根据所述SRS资源配置请求信令的内容,对应配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS resource set。配置SRS resource set的过程参考步骤S1002中的第一种可能实现的方式中,SRS resource set的配置过程,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, after receiving the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will not configure SRS resources for it immediately, only when the base station receives the SRS resource configuration request message sent by the IAB node 1 After the command, the base station configures SRS resources for it. In order to facilitate the understanding of the SRS resource configuration request signaling by those skilled in the art, this embodiment illustrates the SRS resource configuration request signaling as an example. For example, the IAB node 1 sends five sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. If the IAB node 1 needs the base station to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters, the IAB node 1 sends the SRS resource configuration request signaling to the base station. The resource configuration request signaling includes a request to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters. After receiving the SRS resource configuration request signaling, the base station will configure the first four correspondingly according to the content of the SRS resource configuration request signaling. SRS resource set of MIMO parameters. For the process of configuring the SRS resource set, refer to the configuration process of the SRS resource set in the first possible implementation manner in step S1002, which will not be repeated here.
基站将其配置的第一资源集,即配置的SRS resource set发送给IAB节点1,并将SRS resource set的信息和IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured SRS resource set, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the SRS resource set and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2.
需要说明的是,当基站配置的第一资源集只包含一个SRS resource set时,所述SRS resource set中包含多个SRS resource,多个SRS resource对应的是不同的工作模式。例如,在SRS resource set中存在3个SRS resource,这三个SRS resource分别对应全双工、时分和空分这三种工作模式。另外,也存在多个SRS resource对应一种工作模式的情况,例如,在SRS resource set中存在5个SRS resource,其中三个SRS resource对应的是空分工作模式,另外两个分别对应时分和全双工的工作模式;当有多个SRS resource对应一种工作模式时,这多个SRS resource配置的port的数量相同。It should be noted that, when the first resource set configured by the base station only includes one SRS resource set, the SRS resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to different working modes. For example, there are three SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and these three SRS resources correspond to the three working modes of full duplex, time division and space division respectively. In addition, there are also situations where multiple SRS resources correspond to one working mode. For example, there are 5 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, three of which correspond to the space division working mode, and the other two correspond to time division and full Duplex working mode; when there are multiple SRS resources corresponding to one working mode, the number of ports configured by these multiple SRS resources is the same.
步骤S1003:IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第一指示信息Step S1003: the IAB node 2 sends the first indication information to the IAB node 1
具体地,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示IAB节点1向IAB节点2发送SRS信号;其中,所述第一指示信息包括一个或多个SRI,用于指示IAB节点1选择对应的SRS resource,并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向IAB节点2传输SRS信号。Specifically, the IAB node 2 sends first indication information to the IAB node 1, where the first indication information is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2; wherein, the first indication information includes one or more SRIs , used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resource, and transmit the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
步骤S1004:IAB节点1基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,向所述IAB节点2发送第一参考信号。Step S1004: Based on the first indication information, the IAB node 1 sends the first reference signal to the IAB node 2 by using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set.
具体地,IAB节点1接收到IAB节点2发送的第一指示信息后,根据第一状态信息选择与IAB节点1当前工作模式相对应的SRS资源;并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI,从所选的SRS资源中选择SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource中的配置信息向IAB节点1发送第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号为SRS信号。其中,所述第一状态信息包括: IAB节点1的上行定时信息或IAB节点1的DU模块和CU模块的时频资源配置信息或IAB节点1的MT/DU的资源配置以及调度信息或一些定义约束的协议。Specifically, after receiving the first indication information sent by the IAB node 2, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1 according to the first state information; and according to the SRI in the first indication information, An SRS resource is selected from the selected SRS resources, and then a first reference signal is sent to the IAB node 1 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, where the first reference signal is an SRS signal. The first state information includes: uplink timing information of the IAB node 1 or time-frequency resource configuration information of the DU module and CU module of the IAB node 1 or resource configuration of the MT/DU of the IAB node 1 and scheduling information or some definitions binding agreement.
IAB节点1根据所述第一状态信息选择SRS资源主要有以下四种方式:The IAB node 1 mainly selects the SRS resource according to the first state information in the following four ways:
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1的MT采取不同工作模式对应的上行定时,那么IAB节点1就是用对应工作模式的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点1的MT确定采用空分传输模式的上行定时,则IAB节点1使用空分复用模式的SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, if the MT of the IAB node 1 adopts uplink timings corresponding to different working modes, then the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources corresponding to the working modes. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing in the space division transmission mode, the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources in the space division multiplexing mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点2根据IAB节点1的DU、MT的时域资源配置的信息,确定IAB节点1的MT应该使用的SRS资源,并向其发送SRI指示。In a possible implementation manner, the IAB node 2 determines the SRS resource that should be used by the MT of the IAB node 1 according to the time domain resource configuration information of the DU and the MT of the IAB node 1, and sends an SRI indication to it.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点1的MT根据其MT/DU的资源配置以及调度的情况的信息,确定其选择何种工作模式对应的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU上行接收的资源的位置调度IAB节点1的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于全双工的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1选择全双工模式对应的SRS资源;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU下行发送的资源的位置调度IAB节点2的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于空分传输的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1选择空分复用模式对应的SRS资源;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU NA的资源的位置调度IAB节点1的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点2当前所处的工作模式为时分复用模式,那么,IAB节点1选择时分复用模式对应的SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode it selects according to the resource configuration of its MT/DU and the information of the scheduling situation. For example, if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the full-duplex working mode The SRS resource corresponding to the duplex mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 2 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission, then , the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource of the DU NA of the IAB node 1, it means that the current location of the IAB node 2 If the working mode is the time division multiplexing mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通过定义约束(无其它指示或信令)选择对应工作模式的SRS资源,例如对于IAB节点1的DU同传输方向(例如同为上行)的资源,IAB节点2只能指示IAB节点1使用对应全双工模式的SRS resource set;或者,相反传输方向的IAB节点1的DU资源,IAB节点2只能指示IAB节点1使用对应空分复用模式的SRS resource set。In a possible implementation manner, the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode is selected by defining constraints (without other indication or signaling). It can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the full-duplex mode; or, for the DU resources of IAB node 1 in the opposite transmission direction, IAB node 2 can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode. .
IAB节点1根据第一状态信息选择对应的SRS资源后,会根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI选择相应的SRS resource,选择的方式主要有以下两种方式:After selecting the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, the IAB node 1 will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information, and the selection methods mainly include the following two methods:
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第一种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第一状态信息选择对应字段的SRS resource set,并根据第一指示信息中的SRI选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。In a possible implementation, if the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS When the configuration method of the identifier of the resource set is the first method in step S1002, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding field according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information , and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第二种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第一状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource set,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI,在所选的SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。If the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the configuration methods of the identifiers of the SRS resource sets are steps In the second method in S1002, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set from the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第三种方式时,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送一个第三指示信息, 所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集中的SRS resource set的编号与不同工作模式之间的对应关系。IAB节点1根据所述第三指示信息和第一状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource set,并根据第一指示信息中的SRI在所选的SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。If the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the configuration methods of the identifiers of the SRS resource sets are steps In the third manner in S1002, the IAB node 2 sends a third indication information to the IAB node 1, where the third indication information is used to indicate the difference between the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set and the different working modes corresponding relationship. The IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the third indication information and the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set in the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the first indication information, and then according to the selected SRS resource set The configuration information in the SRS resource, send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第一种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第一状态信息选择对应字段的SRS resource,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI,从所选字段的SRS resource中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。In a possible implementation, if the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources are related to MIMO parameters in different working modes When corresponding respectively, and the configuration mode of the identifier of the SRS resource is the first mode in step S1002, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding field according to the first state information, and according to the first indication information Select the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource of the selected field, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第二种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第一状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI,在所选对应编号的SRS resource中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。If the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS resource When the configuration mode of the identification is the second mode in step S1002, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the first state information, and according to the SRI in the first indication information, selects the corresponding numbered SRS resource. Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1002中的第三种方式时,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第三指示信息。IAB节点1根据所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集中的SRS resource set的编号与不同工作模式之间的对应关系。IAB节点1根据所述第三指示信息和所述第一状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI在所选的SRS resource(同一个工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息,向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。If the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS resource When the configuration mode of the identification is the third mode in step S1002, the IAB node 2 sends the third indication information to the IAB node 1. According to the third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate the correspondence between the numbers of the SRS resource sets in the first resource set and different working modes. The IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the third indication information and the first state information, and according to the SRI in the first indication information, the selected SRS resource (the same working mode may correspond to multiple Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource), and then send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
步骤S1005:IAB节点1向IAB节点2上报第一信息。Step S1005: The IAB node 1 reports the first information to the IAB node 2.
具体地,IAB节点1根据第一指示信息和第一状态信息选择SRS resource,并根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向IAB节点2发送SRS信号后,向IAB节点2上报第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。所述第一指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息。所述不可用的TPMI的指示信息所指示的预编码矩阵可能会对处于当前工作模式的IAB节点1向IAB节点2传输上行信号时,产生强干扰等问题。通过向IAB节点2发送不可用的TPMI的指示信息,给IAB节点2参考,即IAB节点2从码本中选择预编码矩阵,不用考虑所述TPMI的指示信息所指示的预编码矩阵,在一定程度上也缩小了IAB节点2查找预编码矩阵的范围。Specifically, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource according to the first indication information and the first state information, and after sending the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, reports the first information to the IAB node 2, so The first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes. The first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes. The precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the unavailable TPMI may cause problems such as strong interference when the IAB node 1 in the current working mode transmits the uplink signal to the IAB node 2. By sending the indication information of the unavailable TPMI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the precoding matrix from the codebook without considering the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the TPMI. To a certain extent, the scope of searching the precoding matrix by the IAB node 2 is also reduced.
不同的工作模式下,可用的port数不同,对于不同的port数,TPMI对应的预编码矩阵也不同。例如,IAB节点的空分复用模式与时分复用模式相比较,可用的port数不同,则对同一TPMI的理解也是不同的。请见表1和表2,表1和表2分别对应的是可用port 数为4的码本和可用port数为2的码本。In different working modes, the number of available ports is different, and for different numbers of ports, the precoding matrix corresponding to TPMI is also different. For example, if the space division multiplexing mode of the IAB node is compared with the time division multiplexing mode, the number of available ports is different, and the understanding of the same TPMI is also different. Please refer to Table 1 and Table 2. Table 1 and Table 2 respectively correspond to a codebook with 4 available ports and a codebook with 2 available ports.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000007
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000008
从表1和表2我们可以得知,可用的port数不同,TPMI对应的预编码矩阵也会有差异,例如对于TPMI为0所指示的预编码矩阵,在可用port数为4时,所述TPMI所指示的预编码矩阵的元素有4个;在可用port数为2时,所述TPMI所指示的预编码矩阵的元素有两个,这两个矩阵显然不是同一个矩阵。From Table 1 and Table 2, we can know that the number of available ports is different, and the precoding matrix corresponding to TPMI will also be different. For example, for the precoding matrix indicated by TPMI 0, when the number of available ports is 4, the There are four elements of the precoding matrix indicated by the TPMI; when the number of available ports is 2, there are two elements of the precoding matrix indicated by the TPMI, and these two matrices are obviously not the same matrix.
值得注意的是,在协议中规定,不同的可用port数有不同的码本,对于同一个TPMI,在不同码本中指示的预编码矩阵是不同的,因此,通过所述第一指示信息中不同工作模式的指示信息可以指示所述TPMI的指示信息对应的是何种工作模式下的码本中的预编码矩阵。It is worth noting that it is stipulated in the protocol that different available port numbers have different codebooks. For the same TPMI, the precoding matrices indicated in different codebooks are different. Therefore, through the first indication information The indication information of different working modes may indicate the precoding matrix in the codebook under which working mode the indication information of the TPMI corresponds to.
步骤S1006:IAB节点2基于第一参考信号和MIMO参数的信息,生成DCI信号,并将DCI信号发送给IAB节点1。Step S1006 : the IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal based on the information of the first reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
具体地,IAB节点2收到IAB节点1发送的第一参考信号,所述第一参考信号为IAB节点1发送的SRS信号,通过SRS信号估计上行信道,获取上行信道的信息。由于基站在配置的SRS资源后,将其配置的SRS资源的信息以及IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息发送给IAB节点2,IAB节点2基于其获得的上行信道的信息和MIMO参数,在码本中为IAB节点2选择最合适的预编码矩阵。若步骤S1003中,IAB节点2发送的指示信息中的SRI的数目为多个时,IAB节点2为IAB节点1选择最合适SRS resource。然后IAB节点2将所选的预编码矩阵对应的TPMI和SRS resource对应的SRI等信息放在DCI信号中,将所述DCI信号传输给IAB节点1。Specifically, the IAB node 2 receives the first reference signal sent by the IAB node 1, where the first reference signal is an SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, and estimates the uplink channel through the SRS signal to obtain the information of the uplink channel. After configuring the SRS resources, the base station sends the information of the configured SRS resources and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 2, and the IAB node 2 obtains the uplink channel information and MIMO parameters based on it. The most suitable precoding matrix is selected for IAB node 2 in the codebook. If in step S1003, the number of SRIs in the indication information sent by the IAB node 2 is multiple, the IAB node 2 selects the most suitable SRS resource for the IAB node 1. Then the IAB node 2 puts information such as the TPMI corresponding to the selected precoding matrix and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
步骤S1007:IAB节点1基于DCI信号,使用MIMO向IAB节点2传输信号。Step S1007: IAB node 1 transmits a signal to IAB node 2 using MIMO based on the DCI signal.
具体地,IAB节点1接收到所述DCI信号后,根据DCI信号中的SRI和TPMI选择IAB节点1当前所处的工作模式所对应的SRS resource和预编码矩阵,并根据所选择的SRS resource中配置的port,IAB节点1选择对应的port,根据所选的预编码矩阵,IAB节点1 给所选port发送的信号加上权值,将加权后的信号通过所选port传输给IAB节点2,实现了使用MIMO向IAB节点2传输信号。Specifically, after receiving the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource and precoding matrix corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1 according to the SRI and TPMI in the DCI signal, and according to the selected SRS resource For the configured port, IAB node 1 selects the corresponding port. According to the selected precoding matrix, IAB node 1 adds a weight to the signal sent by the selected port, and transmits the weighted signal to IAB node 2 through the selected port. The transmission of signals to the IAB node 2 using MIMO is implemented.
与步骤S1004IAB节点1收到IAB节点2发送的第一指示信息,IAB节点1根据第一状态信息选择对应的SRS资源,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI从所选的SRS资源中选择相应的SRS resource类似,IAB节点1在收到所述DCI信号中的TPMI后,通过IAB节点1当前所处的工作模式或结合工作模式的相关参数,从对应工作模式的码本中,根据所述TPMI选择预编码矩阵。主要有以下三种方式来实现:In step S1004, when the IAB node 1 receives the first indication information sent by the IAB node 2, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects from the selected SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information The corresponding SRS resource is similar. After receiving the TPMI in the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 uses the current working mode of the IAB node 1 or the relevant parameters in combination with the working mode, from the codebook of the corresponding working mode, according to the The above TPMI selects the precoding matrix. There are mainly three ways to achieve this:
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1的MT采取不同工作模式对应的上行定时,那么IAB节点1接收的TPMI指示是,对应工作模式传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵。例如,若IAB节点1的MT确定采用空分传输模式的上行定时,则IAB节点1的MT理解接收到的TPMI指示的是空分复用传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵。In a possible implementation manner, if the MT of the IAB node 1 adopts the uplink timing corresponding to different working modes, the TPMI indication received by the IAB node 1 is the number of ports supported by the transmission of the corresponding working mode and the corresponding codebook. the precoding matrix. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing using the space division transmission mode, the MT of the IAB node 1 understands that the received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the space division multiplexing transmission, the number of ports in the corresponding codebook precoding matrix.
在一种可能的实现方式中,对于空分和全双工的工作模式,若IAB节点1的MT接收到相应的功率控制命令,所述功率控制命令隐含地指示了IAB节点1所处的工作模式,则IAB节点1的MT理解其接收到的TPMI指示是对应工作模式传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵。In a possible implementation manner, for the working modes of space division and full duplex, if the MT of the IAB node 1 receives a corresponding power control command, the power control command implicitly indicates the location where the IAB node 1 is located. In the working mode, the MT of the IAB node 1 understands that the TPMI indication it receives is the number of ports supported by the transmission in the corresponding working mode and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点1的MT根据其MT/DU的资源配置以及调度的情况,理解其接收的TPMI指示的是哪种工作模式传输所支持的port数、对应的码本中的预编码矩阵。例如,若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU上行接收的资源的位置调度IAB节点1的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于全双工的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1理解其接收的TPMI,指示的是全双工工作模式传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU下行发送的资源的位置调度IAB节点2的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于空分传输的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1理解其接收的TPMI指示的是,空分工作模式传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU NA的资源的位置调度IAB节点1的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点2当前所处的工作模式为时分复用模式,那么,IAB节点1理解其接收的TPMI指示的是,时分复用模式传输所支持的port数、所对应的码本中的预编码矩阵。In a possible implementation manner, the MT of the IAB node 1 understands, according to the resource configuration and scheduling of its MT/DU, the number of ports and the corresponding codebook that the TPMI it receives indicates which working mode transmission supports. The precoding matrix in . For example, if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 understands that The received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the full-duplex working mode transmission and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook; if the IAB node 2 schedules the IAB node 2 at the location of the resources sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1 The MT transmits the uplink signal, which means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission. Then, the IAB node 1 understands that the TPMI it receives indicates the number of ports supported by the space division working mode transmission and the corresponding code. The precoding matrix in this book; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the resource position of the DU NA of the IAB node 1, it means that the current working mode of the IAB node 2 is the time division multiplexing mode, Then, the IAB node 1 understands that the received TPMI indicates the number of ports supported by the time division multiplexing mode transmission and the precoding matrix in the corresponding codebook.
本实施例,下级节点(IAB节点1)在向上级节点(IAB节点2)用MIMO传输上行信号之前,先向基站上报多套MIMO参数,所述多套MIMO参数对应的是不同的工作模式。基站接收到下级节点上报的MIMO参数后,配置多套SRS资源,所述SRS资源分别对应不同工作模式。基站将SRS资源发送给下级节点,并将所述SRS资源的信息和MIMO参数的信息发送给上级节点。上级节点向下级节点发送第一指示信息,下级节点根据所述第一状态信息选择对应的SRS资源,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI选择所选的SRS资源中对应的SRS resource,并根据所选择的SRS resource中的配置信息,向上级节点发送SRS信号。在向上级节点发送信号后,下级节点再向上级节点发送第一信息,给上级节点在从对应工作模式的码本中选择预编码矩阵做参考。上级节点根据下级节点发送的SRS信号估计上行信道,获得上行信道的信息,基于所述上行信道的信息、SRS资源以及MIMO参数 向下级节点发送DCI信号,下行节点根据DCI信号中的信息选择SRS resource和预编码矩阵,并基于SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵,使用MIMO向上级节点传输信号。下级节点向基站上报多套MIMO参数,并获得了多套SRS资源,当下级节点处于其它工作模式,选择相应工作模式的SRS资源和预编码矩阵,使用MIMO向上级节点传输信号。避免了下级节点在处于其他工作模式时(例如,下级节点处于时分复用模式,后来处于空分复用模式传输信号),带来的自干扰等问题,提高了信号的传输质量。In this embodiment, the subordinate node (IAB node 1) reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station before transmitting the uplink signal to the superior node (IAB node 2) using MIMO, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes. After receiving the MIMO parameters reported by the subordinate node, the base station configures multiple sets of SRS resources, and the SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes. The base station sends the SRS resource to the lower node, and sends the information of the SRS resource and the information of the MIMO parameter to the upper node. The upper-level node sends the first indication information to the lower-level node, and the lower-level node selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource in the selected SRS resource according to the SRI in the first indication information, and According to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource, the SRS signal is sent to the upper node. After sending the signal to the higher-level node, the lower-level node sends the first information to the upper-level node for reference in selecting a precoding matrix from the codebook corresponding to the working mode for the upper-level node. The upper-level node estimates the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the lower-level node, obtains the information of the uplink channel, sends the DCI signal to the lower-level node based on the information of the uplink channel, SRS resources and MIMO parameters, and the downlink node selects the SRS resource according to the information in the DCI signal. and precoding matrix, and based on the configuration information and precoding matrix in the SRS resource, use MIMO to transmit signals to the upper node. The subordinate node reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station and obtains multiple sets of SRS resources. When the subordinate node is in other working modes, it selects the SRS resources and precoding matrix of the corresponding working mode, and uses MIMO to transmit signals to the superior node. Problems such as self-interference caused when the subordinate node is in other working modes (for example, the subordinate node is in the time division multiplexing mode and then transmits the signal in the space division multiplexing mode) is avoided, and the transmission quality of the signal is improved.
另外,在本实施例中,下级IAB节点可以向上级IAB节点上报不同双工复用模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息,避免了下级IAB节点处于空分复用模式或者全双工模式时,上级IAB节点调度下级IAB节点使用造成强干扰的TPMI。同时,IAB节点和基站对不同工作模式的TPMI的理解也有所不同,为了避免同一个TPMI指示信息指示多个码本中的预编码矩阵,因此,在第一信息中还包括不同工作模式的指示信息,使得所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息指示的预编码矩阵唯一。In addition, in this embodiment, the lower-level IAB node can report the indication information of the unavailable TPMI in different duplex multiplexing modes to the upper-level IAB node, so as to avoid the situation when the lower-level IAB node is in the space division multiplexing mode or the full-duplex mode. , the upper-level IAB node schedules the lower-level IAB node to use the TPMI that causes strong interference. At the same time, the IAB node and the base station have different understandings of TPMI in different working modes. In order to prevent the same TPMI indication information from indicating precoding matrices in multiple codebooks, the first information also includes indications of different working modes. information, so that the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes is unique.
请参见图11,图11是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于码本的上行链路传输方法流程图。第一节点向第二节点通过MIMO传输信号之前,先向网络设备发送时分复用模式下的MIMO参数。然后网络设备向所述第一节点发送一个请求信令,要求其上传其它MIMO参数。所述第一节点基于所述请求命令的内容向网络设备上报一套或多套MIMO参数,网络设备收到MIMO参数后配置第一资源集,所述第一资源集中包括多个SRS资源,网络设备将第一资源集发送给第一节点。第一节点选择相应的SRS resource和预编码矩阵,根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵使用MIMO向第二节点传输信号。图11以第一节点为IAB节点1,第二节点为IAB节点2,网络设备为基站为例。如图11所示,另一种MIMO基于码本的方式进行上行链路传输的流程如下:Referring to FIG. 11 , FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Before transmitting the signal to the second node through MIMO, the first node first sends the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode to the network device. Then the network device sends a request signaling to the first node, requesting it to upload other MIMO parameters. The first node reports one or more sets of MIMO parameters to the network device based on the content of the request command, and the network device configures a first resource set after receiving the MIMO parameters, the first resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the network device configures a first resource set. The device sends the first resource set to the first node. The first node selects the corresponding SRS resource and precoding matrix, and uses MIMO to transmit signals to the second node according to the configuration information and precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource. FIG. 11 takes as an example that the first node is IAB node 1, the second node is IAB node 2, and the network device is a base station. As shown in Figure 11, another MIMO codebook-based uplink transmission process is as follows:
步骤S1101:IAB节点1向基站上报第二参数。Step S1101: The IAB node 1 reports the second parameter to the base station.
具体地,所述第二参数为所述第一节点在第一工作模式下的MIMO参数,所述第二参数为第一节点上报的、与时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数;所述第一工作模式为时分复用模式。Specifically, the second parameter is the MIMO parameter of the first node in the first working mode, and the second parameter is the MIMO parameter reported by the first node and corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode; the first The working mode is time division multiplexing mode.
步骤S1102:基站接收IAB节点1发送的第二参数,并向IAB节点1发送第一请求信令。Step S1102: The base station receives the second parameter sent by the IAB node 1, and sends the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
具体地,基站在收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数后,会向IAB节点1发送第一请求信令,所述第一请求信令用于让IAB节点1上报除时分复用模式以外的一套或多套MIMO参数。基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式下的MIMO参数后,有以下3种处理方式:Specifically, after receiving the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time-division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will send the first request signaling to the IAB node 1, and the first request signaling is used for the IAB node 1 to report the time division multiplexing mode. One or more sets of MIMO parameters other than the multiplexing mode. After the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, there are the following three processing methods:
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站根据IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数,为其配置第一参考信号资源的集合,所述第一参考信号资源的集合为与时分复用模式对应的SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set为基站配置的SRS资源,基站将配置的SRS资源和第一请求信令发送给IAB节点1。In a possible implementation manner, the base station configures a set of first reference signal resources for it according to the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, where the set of first reference signal resources is time division multiplexed The SRS resource set corresponding to the mode, the SRS resource set is the SRS resource configured by the base station, and the base station sends the configured SRS resource and the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数后,配置与所述时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数所对应的第一参考信号资源的集合, 向IAB节点1发送第一请求信令。In a possible implementation manner, after receiving the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station configures the set of first reference signal resources corresponding to the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode, Send the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数后,向IAB节点1发送第一请求信令。In a possible implementation manner, after receiving the MIMO parameter corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1, the base station sends the first request signaling to the IAB node 1.
步骤S1103:IAB节点1根据所述第一请求信令向基站上报第三参数。Step S1103: The IAB node 1 reports the third parameter to the base station according to the first request signaling.
具体地,基站向IAB节点1发送的第一请求信令中,要求IAB节点1上报第三参数,所述第三参数包括一套或多套除时分复用模式以外的MIMO参数。当IAB节点1根据所述第一请求信令向基站上报第三参数的操作参考步骤S1001,此处不再赘述。Specifically, in the first request signaling sent by the base station to the IAB node 1, the IAB node 1 is required to report a third parameter, where the third parameter includes one or more sets of MIMO parameters other than the time division multiplexing mode. When the IAB node 1 reports the third parameter to the base station according to the first request signaling, refer to step S1001, which is not repeated here.
步骤S1104:基站接收第三参数,并配置参考信号资源,将其配置的参考信号资源发送给IAB节点1,并向IAB节点2发送所述参考信号资源的信息和第二参数、第三参数的信息。Step S1104: The base station receives the third parameter, configures the reference signal resource, sends the configured reference signal resource to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the reference signal resource and the information of the second parameter and the third parameter to the IAB node 2. information.
具体地,接收IAB节点1上报的第三参数后,向IAB节点1发送其配置的参考信号资源有以下四种处理方式:Specifically, after receiving the third parameter reported by the IAB node 1, there are the following four processing methods for sending the configured reference signal resources to the IAB node 1:
在一种可能实现的方式中,若基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式下的MIMO参数后的处理方式是步骤S1102中的第一种方式时,基站在收到IAB节点1根据所述第一请求信令上报第三参数后,为其配置对应资源集,并将配置的资源集发送给IAB节点1。其中,所述资源集包括多个参考信号的集合,所述多个参考信号的集合为多个SRS resource set;其中,所述多个SRS resource set分别对应所述第三参数中不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,且所述一个SRS resource set中的参考信号资源的功能相同,所述参考信号资源为SRS resource;或者所述资源集包括一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为SRS resource set,其中所述SRS resource set包括多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源为多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource分别对应所述第三参数中不同工作模式下的MIMO参数。In a possible implementation manner, if the processing method after the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1 is the first method in step S1102, the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After reporting the third parameter through the first request signaling, configure the corresponding resource set for it, and send the configured resource set to the IAB node 1 . Wherein, the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signals, and the set of multiple reference signals is multiple SRS resource sets; wherein, the multiple SRS resource sets respectively correspond to different working modes in the third parameter MIMO parameters, and the functions of the reference signal resources in the one SRS resource set are the same, and the reference signal resources are SRS resources; or the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of the reference signal resources is SRS resource set, wherein the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to the MIMO under different working modes in the third parameter parameter.
在一种可能实现的方式中,若基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式下的MIMO参数后的处理方式是步骤S1102中的第二种方式时,基站接收到IAB节点1基于所述第一请求信令上报的第三参数后,基站为其配置资源集。其中,所述资源集包括多个参考信号的集合,所述多个参考信号的集合为多个SRS resource set;其中,所述多个SRS resource set分别对应所述第三参数中不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,且所述一个SRS resource set中的参考信号资源的功能相同,所述参考信号资源为SRS resource;或者所述资源集包括一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为SRS resource set,其中所述SRS resource set包括多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源为多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource分别对应所述第三参数中不同工作模式下的MIMO参数。然后,基站将其配置的资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合发送给IAB节点1。In a possible implementation manner, if the processing method after the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1 is the second method in step S1102, the base station receives the IAB node 1 based on the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures a resource set for it. Wherein, the resource set includes a set of multiple reference signals, and the set of multiple reference signals is multiple SRS resource sets; wherein, the multiple SRS resource sets respectively correspond to different working modes in the third parameter MIMO parameters, and the functions of the reference signal resources in the one SRS resource set are the same, and the reference signal resources are SRS resources; or the resource set includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of the reference signal resources is SRS resource set, wherein the SRS resource set includes multiple reference signal resources, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to the MIMO under different working modes in the third parameter parameter. Then, the base station sends its configured resource set and the first reference signal resource set to the IAB node 1 .
在一种可能实现的方式中,若基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式下的MIMO参数后的处理方式是步骤S1102中的第三种方式时,基站接收到IAB节点1根据所述第一请求信令上报的第三参数后,基站为根据算数第三参数配置资源集,并将配置的资源集发送给IAB节点1。In a possible implementation manner, if the processing method after the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1 is the third method in step S1102, the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures the resource set according to the arithmetic third parameter, and sends the configured resource set to the IAB node 1 .
在一种可能实现的方式中,若基站接收到IAB节点1上报的时分复用模式下的MIMO参数后的处理方式是步骤S1102中的第三种方式时,基站接收到IAB节点1根据所述第一 请求信令上报的第三参数后,基站根据第三参数配置资源集,根据第二参数配置第一参考信号资源的集合,并将配置的资源集和第一参考信号资源的集合发送给IAB节点1。In a possible implementation manner, if the processing method after the base station receives the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode reported by the IAB node 1 is the third method in step S1102, the base station receives the IAB node 1 according to the After the third parameter reported by the first request signaling, the base station configures the resource set according to the third parameter, configures the first reference signal resource set according to the second parameter, and sends the configured resource set and the first reference signal resource set to the IAB node 1.
步骤S1105~步骤S1109分别参考步骤S1003~步骤S1007,此处不再赘述。Steps S1105 to S1109 refer to steps S1003 to S1007 respectively, which will not be repeated here.
本实施例提供了IAB节点向基站上报MIMO参数的另外一种方式,即:IAB节点向基站上报时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数,基站接收到其上报MIMO参数后,向所述IAB节点发送第一请求信令,用于指示所述IAB节点发送一套或多套除时分复用模式对应的MIMO参数,然后配置相应的SRS资源。通过这种方式,基站配置第一请求信令中要求上报的MIMO参数的SRS资源,在一定程度上,避免了SRS资源的浪费。This embodiment provides another way for the IAB node to report the MIMO parameters to the base station, that is: the IAB node reports the MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode to the base station, and after the base station receives the reported MIMO parameters, the base station sends the first MIMO parameter to the IAB node. A request signaling is used to instruct the IAB node to send one or more sets of MIMO parameters corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode, and then configure corresponding SRS resources. In this way, the base station configures the SRS resources of the MIMO parameters required to be reported in the first request signaling, which avoids waste of SRS resources to a certain extent.
请参见图12,图12是本申请实施例提供的另一种MIMO基于非码本的上行链路传输方法流程图。第一节点向第二节点通过MIMO传输信号之前,先向网络设备分别上报多套不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,网络设备根据其接收到的多套MIMO参数,第一资源集。第一节点根据第二节点发送的第一信道状态参考信号,计算出当前工作模式的预编码矩阵。然后,第一节点根据计算得到的预编码矩阵和根据第二指示信息和第二状态信息选择的参考信号资源中的配置信息,通过MIMO向第二节点传输上行信号。图12以第一节点为IAB节点1,第二节点为IAB节点2,网络设备为基站为例,如图12所示,另一种MIMO基于非码本的方式进行上行链路传输的流程如下:Referring to FIG. 12, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of another MIMO non-codebook-based uplink transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Before the first node transmits signals to the second node through MIMO, it first reports multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device, and the network device obtains the first resource set according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters received. The first node calculates the precoding matrix of the current working mode according to the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node. Then, the first node transmits the uplink signal to the second node through MIMO according to the calculated precoding matrix and the configuration information in the reference signal resource selected according to the second indication information and the second state information. Figure 12 takes the first node as IAB node 1, the second node as IAB node 2, and the network device as a base station as an example, as shown in Figure 12, another MIMO-based non-codebook-based uplink transmission process is as follows :
步骤S1201:IAB节点1将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给基站。Step S1201: The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
具体地,本实施例中,IAB节点1向基站上报多套不同工作模式下的MIMO参数的过程和操作与步骤S1001类似,请参考步骤S1001,此处不再赘述。Specifically, in this embodiment, the process and operation of the IAB node 1 reporting multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station are similar to step S1001, please refer to step S1001, which will not be repeated here.
步骤S1202:基站接收IAB节点1上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,并根据所述MIMO参数配置第一资源集,并将所述第一资源集发送给所述IAB节点1;将所述第一资源集的信息和MIMO参数信息发送给IAB节点2。Step S1202: The base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1; The information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
具体地,基站接收到IAB节点1的MT发送的多套MIMO参数后,无论所述MIMO参数与不同工作模式之间的关系是隐式还是显式的,基站根据所述MIMO参数中的信息,配置第一资源集。Specifically, after the base station receives multiple sets of MIMO parameters sent by the MT of IAB node 1, no matter whether the relationship between the MIMO parameters and different working modes is implicit or explicit, the base station, according to the information in the MIMO parameters, Configure the first resource set.
在一种可能实现的方式中,基站根据IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数配置的第一资源集包含多个参考信号的资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为SRS resource set的集合,多个每个SRS resource set分别对应不同的与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,所述多个SRS resource set为基站配置的、与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点1的MT分别上报与全双工模式、时分复用模式以及空分复用模式具有显式或隐式关系的MIMO参数,基站会分别配置这三个不同工作模式的SRS resource set。与基于码本传输的方式中的SRS resource不同的是,在一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource的数量不超过4个,且每个SRS resource只能配置一个port。同时,基站也以SRS resource set或SRS resource为单位,为其配置对应的信道状态参考信号,所述信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号。In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is a set of SRS resource set Set, each of the multiple SRS resource sets corresponds to different MIMO parameters corresponding to the different working modes respectively, and the multiple SRS resource sets are configured by the base station and correspond to the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively. SRS resources. For example, if the MT of IAB node 1 reports MIMO parameters that have an explicit or implicit relationship with the full-duplex mode, time-division multiplexing mode, and space-division multiplexing mode, the base station will configure the SRS resources of these three different working modes respectively. set. Different from the SRS resource in the codebook-based transmission method, the number of SRS resources in an SRS resource set does not exceed 4, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port. At the same time, the base station also uses the SRS resource set or SRS resource as a unit to configure a corresponding channel state reference signal for it, and the channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal.
基站在配置多个SRS resource set时,会给每个SRS resource set配置标识,配置标识的方式主要有以下三种:第一种方式为,基站显式地配置SRS resource set与不同工作模式之 间的关系,例如:在SRS resource set中新增字段{SDM}用于指示该SRS resource set对应的是空分复用模式下的SRS资源,通过新增字段的方法,来显式指示SRS resource set的功能;第二种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource set进行编号(从0开始),且指定一个协议规定每个编号所对应的功能,其中,所述协议是基站和IAB节点所确知的,例如:协议规定编号为0的SRS resource set是用于TDM传输的SRS resource set;第三种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource set进行编号(从0开始),当IAB节点2向IAB节点1的MT发送指示信息时,会向IAB节点1的MT发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示SRS resource set的编号对应的不同工作模式;其中,所述第三指示信息是根据基站向IAB节点2发送的所述编号对应不同工作模式的信息生成的。通过上述第一种和第二种方式,当IAB节点1的MT收到SRS resource set时,会通过其中的标识知道SRS resource set是对应哪个不同工作模式配置的;通过上述第三种方式,基站对其SRS resource set仅进行编号,用于区分SRS resource set。When the base station configures multiple SRS resource sets, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource set. There are three main ways to configure the identifier. For example, a new field {SDM} is added in the SRS resource set to indicate that the SRS resource set corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the SRS resource set is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field. The second method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node. For example, the protocol stipulates that the SRS resource set numbered 0 is the SRS resource set used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource set (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the IAB When the MT of the node 1 sends the indication information, it will send the third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, and the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the numbers of the SRS resource set; wherein, the third indication information It is generated according to the information that the numbers correspond to different working modes sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 . Through the first and second methods above, when the MT of IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource set, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource set corresponds to through the identifier in it; through the third method above, the base station The SRS resource set is only numbered to distinguish the SRS resource set.
基站将其配置的第一资源集,即配置的多个SRS resource set发送给IAB节点1,并将所述多个SRS resource set的信息、IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息以及配置的CSI-RS信号发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured multiple SRS resource sets, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the multiple SRS resource sets, the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, and the configured The CSI-RS signal is sent to the IAB node 2.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站根据IAB节点1的MT上报的多套MIMO参数配置的第一资源集包含一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合为一个SRS resource set,在所述SRS resource set中有多个参考信号资源,所述多个参考信号资源为多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource分别对应不同的工作模式与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,所述多个SRS resource为基站配置的、与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应的SRS资源。每个SRS resource只能配置一个port,多个SRS resource对应不同的工作模式。其中,允许一个或多个SRS resource对应一种工作模式。同时,基站也根据不同的工作模式配置对应的CSI-RS信号。In a possible implementation manner, the first resource set configured by the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the MT of the IAB node 1 includes a set of reference signal resources, and the set of reference signal resources is an SRS resource set. There are multiple reference signal resources in the SRS resource set, the multiple reference signal resources are multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes and the MIMO parameters under the different working modes respectively correspond , the multiple SRS resources are the SRS resources configured by the base station and corresponding to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively. Each SRS resource can only be configured with one port, and multiple SRS resources correspond to different working modes. Among them, one or more SRS resources are allowed to correspond to a working mode. At the same time, the base station also configures corresponding CSI-RS signals according to different working modes.
基站在配置多个SRS resource时,会给每个SRS resource配置标识,配置标识的方式主要有以下三种:第一种方式为,基站显式地配置SRS resource与不同工作模式之间的关系,例如,在SRS resource中新增字段{SDM}用于指示该SRS resource对应的是空分复用模式下的SRS资源,通过新增字段的方法,来显式指示SRS resource的功能;第二种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource进行编号(从0开始),且指定一个协议规定每个编号所对应的功能,其中,所述协议是基站和IAB节点所确知的,例如:协议规定编号为0的SRS resource是用于TDM传输的SRS resource;第三种方式为,基站为配置的SRS resource进行编号(从0开始),当IAB节点2向IAB节点1的MT发送指示信息时,会向IAB节点1的MT发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示SRS resource的编号对应的不同工作模式;其中,所述第三指示信息是基于基站向IAB节点2发送的编号对应不同工作模式的信息生成的。通过上述第一种和第二种方式,当IAB节点1的MT收到SRS resource时,会通过其中的标识知道SRS resource是对应哪个不同工作模式配置的;通过上述第三种方式,基站对其SRS resource仅进行编号,用于区分SRS resource。When the base station configures multiple SRS resources, it will configure an identifier for each SRS resource. There are mainly three ways to configure the identifier. The first method is that the base station explicitly configures the relationship between the SRS resource and different working modes. For example, a new field {SDM} is added in the SRS resource to indicate that the SRS resource corresponds to the SRS resource in the space division multiplexing mode, and the function of the SRS resource is explicitly indicated by the method of adding a new field; the second The method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resources (starting from 0), and specifies a protocol to specify the function corresponding to each number, wherein the protocol is known by the base station and the IAB node, for example: the protocol specifies the number The SRS resource of 0 is the SRS resource used for TDM transmission; the third method is that the base station numbers the configured SRS resource (starting from 0), when the IAB node 2 sends the instruction information to the MT of the IAB node 1, it will Send the third indication information to the MT of the IAB node 1, where the third indication information is used to indicate different working modes corresponding to the number of the SRS resource; wherein, the third indication information is based on the number corresponding to the number sent by the base station to the IAB node 2 generated from the information of different working modes. Through the first and second methods above, when the MT of the IAB node 1 receives the SRS resource, it will know which different working mode the SRS resource is configured for through the identifier; SRS resources are only numbered to distinguish SRS resources.
基站将其配置好的第一资源集发送给IAB节点1,并将所述第一资源集的信息、IAB节点1上传的多套MIMO参数的信息以及配置的CSI-RS信号发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set to IAB node 1, and sends the information of the first resource set, the information of multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by IAB node 1, and the configured CSI-RS signal to IAB node 2 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,基站接收IAB节点1上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数后,不会立即为其配置SRS资源,只有当基站接收IAB节点1发送的SRS资源配置请求信令后,基站为其配置SRS资源。为了便于本领域技术人员理解所述SRS资源配置请求信令,本实施例对其进行举例说明。例如,IAB节点1分别向基站发送了5套MIMO参数,若IAB节点1需要基站配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS资源时,IAB节点1会向基站发送SRS资源配置请求信令,在所述SRS资源配置请求信令中包含配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS资源的请求,基站在收到所述SRS资源配置请求信令后,会根据所述SRS资源配置请求信令的内容,对应配置前面四套MIMO参数的SRS resource set。同时,基站也以SRS resource set为单位,为其配置对应的CSI-RS信号。配置SRS resource set的过程参考步骤S1202中的第一种可能实现的方式中,SRS resource set的配置过程,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, after receiving the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, the base station will not configure SRS resources for it immediately, only when the base station receives the SRS resource configuration request message sent by the IAB node 1 After the command, the base station configures SRS resources for it. In order to facilitate the understanding of the SRS resource configuration request signaling by those skilled in the art, this embodiment illustrates the SRS resource configuration request signaling as an example. For example, the IAB node 1 sends five sets of MIMO parameters to the base station respectively. If the IAB node 1 needs the base station to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters, the IAB node 1 sends the SRS resource configuration request signaling to the base station. The resource configuration request signaling includes a request to configure the SRS resources of the first four sets of MIMO parameters. After receiving the SRS resource configuration request signaling, the base station will configure the first four correspondingly according to the content of the SRS resource configuration request signaling. SRS resource set of MIMO parameters. At the same time, the base station also uses the SRS resource set as a unit to configure the corresponding CSI-RS signal for it. For the process of configuring the SRS resource set, refer to the configuration process of the SRS resource set in the first possible implementation manner in step S1202, which will not be repeated here.
基站将其配置的第一资源集,即配置的SRS resource set发送给IAB节点1,并将SRS resource set的信息和IAB节点1上传的多套MIMO参数的信息以及配置的CSI-RS信号发送给IAB节点2。The base station sends its configured first resource set, that is, the configured SRS resource set, to the IAB node 1, and sends the information of the SRS resource set, the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters uploaded by the IAB node 1, and the configured CSI-RS signal to the IAB node 1. IAB node 2.
需要说明的是,当基站配置的第一资源集只包含一个SRS resource set时,所述SRS resource set中包含多个SRS resource,多个SRS resource对应的可以是不同的工作模式。例如,在SRS resource set中存在3个SRS resource,这三个SRS resource分别对应全双工、时分和空分这三种工作模式。另外,也存在多个SRS resource对应一种工作模式的情况,例如,在SRS resource set中存在5个SRS resource,其中三个SRS resource对应的是空分工作模式,另外两个分别对应时分和全双工的工作模式;每个SRS resource只能配置一个port。It should be noted that when the first resource set configured by the base station only includes one SRS resource set, the SRS resource set includes multiple SRS resources, and the multiple SRS resources may correspond to different working modes. For example, there are three SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and these three SRS resources correspond to the three working modes of full duplex, time division and space division respectively. In addition, there are also situations where multiple SRS resources correspond to one working mode. For example, there are 5 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, three of which correspond to the space division working mode, and the other two correspond to time division and full Duplex working mode; only one port can be configured for each SRS resource.
步骤S1203:IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号。Step S1203: The IAB node 2 sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the IAB node 1.
具体地,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示IAB节点1向IAB节点2发送SRS信号;其中,所述第二指示信息包括一个或多个SRI,用于指示IAB节点1选择对应的SRS resouce。同时,IAB节点2根据IAB节点1所处的工作模式向IAB节点1发送与IAB节点1所处工作模式相对应第一信道状态参考信号,所述第一信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号,用于IAB节点1估计下行信道。Specifically, the IAB node 2 sends second indication information to the IAB node 1, where the second indication information is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the IAB node 2; wherein, the second indication information includes one or more SRIs , used to instruct IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resouce. At the same time, the IAB node 2 sends the first channel state reference signal corresponding to the working mode of the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 1 according to the working mode of the IAB node 1, and the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal, Used for IAB node 1 to estimate the downlink channel.
步骤S1204:IAB节点1基于第一信道状态参考信号估计下行信道,得到下行信道信息,根据下行信道信息确定上行信道信息,得到上行信道矩阵。IAB节点1对上行信道矩阵进行运算处理,得到预编码矩阵。IAB节点1根据第二指示信息和第二状态信息选择第二参考信号资源,并根据所述第二参考信号资源中的配置信息和预编码矩阵向IAB节点2发送SRS信号。Step S1204: The IAB node 1 estimates the downlink channel based on the first channel state reference signal, obtains the downlink channel information, determines the uplink channel information according to the downlink channel information, and obtains the uplink channel matrix. The IAB node 1 performs arithmetic processing on the uplink channel matrix to obtain a precoding matrix. The IAB node 1 selects the second reference signal resource according to the second indication information and the second state information, and sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the second reference signal resource.
具体地,IAB节点1接收第一状态参考信号,所述第一状态参考信号为与IAB节点1当前工作模式相对应的CSI-RS信号,当IAB节点1接收所述CSI-RS信号后,根据所述CSI-RS信号获取上行信道的信息,根据所获得的上行信道的信息得到一个上行信道的信道矩阵,具体过程为:若IAB节点2通过四个port AP0~AP3向IAB节点1发送CSI-RS信号,IAB节点1有四个port BP0~BP4接收所述CSI-RS信号,那么根据收发port可以得到一个4x4的下行信道矩阵:Specifically, the IAB node 1 receives the first state reference signal, and the first state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal corresponding to the current working mode of the IAB node 1. After the IAB node 1 receives the CSI-RS signal, it is based on The CSI-RS signal obtains the information of the uplink channel, and obtains a channel matrix of the uplink channel according to the obtained information of the uplink channel, and the specific process is: if the IAB node 2 sends the CSI- RS signal, IAB node 1 has four ports BP0~BP4 to receive the CSI-RS signal, then a 4x4 downlink channel matrix can be obtained according to the transceiver port:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000009
上述信道矩阵中的每个元素表示信号传输的概率,以元素h 12为例,h 12表示的是port AP0发送信号,port BP1接收信号的概率。 Each element in the above channel matrix represents the probability of signal transmission. Taking element h 12 as an example, h 12 represents the probability that port AP0 sends a signal and port BP1 receives a signal.
得到下行信道矩阵后,IAB节点1可根据得到的下行信道矩阵得到上行信道矩阵,假设上行信道矩阵和下行信道矩阵为转置关系,即:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000010
则上行信道矩阵为:
After obtaining the downlink channel matrix, the IAB node 1 can obtain the uplink channel matrix according to the obtained downlink channel matrix. It is assumed that the uplink channel matrix and the downlink channel matrix are in a transposed relationship, that is:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000010
Then the upstream channel matrix is:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000011
IAB节点1将上行信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000012
经过运算处理,例如特征值分解(SVD分解)等方式,计算出IAB节点1上行发送SRS的权值,获得预编码矩阵,预编码矩阵的计算过程如下:
IAB node 1 converts the uplink channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000012
After operation processing, such as eigenvalue decomposition (SVD decomposition), the weight of the SRS sent by IAB node 1 in the uplink is calculated, and the precoding matrix is obtained. The calculation process of the precoding matrix is as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2020121327-appb-000013
上述预编码矩阵中的每个元素表示IAB节点1上行传输SRS信号时的权值,以元素d 12为例,d 12表示,若IAB节点1的port BP0向IAB节点1发送SRS信号,IAB节点2的port AP1接收SRS信号,在所发送SRS信号的权值为d 12Each element in the above precoding matrix represents the weight when the IAB node 1 transmits the SRS signal in the uplink. Taking element d 12 as an example, d 12 represents that if the port BP0 of the IAB node 1 sends the SRS signal to the IAB node 1, the IAB node The port AP1 of 2 receives the SRS signal, and the weight of the transmitted SRS signal is d 12 .
IAB节点1接收到IAB节点2发送的第二指示信息后,选择SRS资源主要有以下四种方式:After IAB node 1 receives the second indication information sent by IAB node 2, there are mainly the following four ways to select SRS resources:
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1的MT采取不同工作模式对应的上行定时,那么IAB节点1就是用对应工作模式的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点1的MT确定采用空分传输模式的上行定时,则IAB节点1使用空分复用模式的SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, if the MT of the IAB node 1 adopts uplink timings corresponding to different working modes, then the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources corresponding to the working modes. For example, if the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the uplink timing in the space division transmission mode, the IAB node 1 uses the SRS resources in the space division multiplexing mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点2根据IAB节点1的DU、MT的时域资源配置的信息,确定IAB节点1的MT应该使用的SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, the IAB node 2 determines the SRS resource that should be used by the MT of the IAB node 1 according to the time domain resource configuration information of the DU and the MT of the IAB node 1 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点1的MT根据其MT/DU的资源配置以及调度的情况的信息,确定其选择何种工作模式对应的SRS资源。例如,若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU上行接收的资源的位置调度IAB节点1的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于全双工的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1选择全双工模式对应的SRS资源;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU下行发送的资源的位置调度IAB节点2的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点1可能处于空分传输的工作模式,那么,IAB节点1选择空分复用模式对应的SRS资源;若IAB节点2在IAB节点1的DU NA的资源的位置调度IAB节点1 的MT传输上行信号,则意味着IAB节点2当前所处的工作模式为时分复用模式,那么,IAB节点1选择时分复用模式对应的SRS资源。In a possible implementation manner, the MT of the IAB node 1 determines the SRS resource corresponding to which working mode it selects according to the resource configuration of its MT/DU and the information of the scheduling situation. For example, if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource received by the DU uplink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the full-duplex working mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the full-duplex working mode The SRS resource corresponding to the duplex mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 2 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource sent by the DU downlink of the IAB node 1, it means that the IAB node 1 may be in the working mode of space division transmission, then , the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode; if the IAB node 2 schedules the MT of the IAB node 1 to transmit the uplink signal at the location of the resource of the DU NA of the IAB node 1, it means that the current location of the IAB node 2 If the working mode is the time division multiplexing mode, then the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the time division multiplexing mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通过定义约束(无其它指示或信令)选择对应工作模式的SRS资源,例如对于IAB节点1的DU同传输方向(例如同为上行)的资源,IAB节点2只能指示IAB节点1使用对应全双工模式的SRS resource set;或者,相反传输方向的IAB节点1的DU资源,IAB节点2只能指示IAB节点1使用对应空分复用模式的SRS resource set。In a possible implementation manner, the SRS resource corresponding to the working mode is selected by defining constraints (without other indication or signaling). It can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the full-duplex mode; or, for the DU resources of IAB node 1 in the opposite transmission direction, IAB node 2 can only instruct IAB node 1 to use the SRS resource set corresponding to the space division multiplexing mode. .
IAB节点1根据所述第二状态信息选择对应的SRS资源后,会根据所述第二指示信息中的SRI选择对应的SRS resource,选择的方式主要有以下两种方式:After selecting the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, the IAB node 1 will select the corresponding SRS resource according to the SRI in the second indication information, and the selection methods mainly include the following two methods:
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第一种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第二状态信息选择对应字段的SRS resource set,并根据第二指示信息中的SRI选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。In a possible implementation, if the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS When the configuration method of the identifier of the resource set is the first method in step S1202, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding field according to the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information , and then send SRS signals with weights to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第二种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第二状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource set,并根据所述第二指示信息中的SRI,在所选的SRS resource set中选择相应的SRS resource,并基于预编码矩阵和所选的SRS resource中的配置信息分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。If the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the configuration methods of the identifiers of the SRS resource sets are steps In the second method in S1202, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set from the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information SRS resource, and send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 based on the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为基站配置的多个SRS resource set,所述多个SRS resource set与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource set的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第三种方式时,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送一个第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集中的SRS resource set的编号与不同工作模式之间的对应关系。IAB节点1根据所述第四指示信息和第二状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource set,并根据第二指示信息中的SRI在所选的SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据预编码矩阵和所选的SRS resource中的配置信息分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。If the SRS resources received by the IAB node 1 are multiple SRS resource sets configured by the base station, the multiple SRS resource sets correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the configuration methods of the identifiers of the SRS resource sets are steps In the third method in S1202, the IAB node 2 sends a fourth indication information to the IAB node 1, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the difference between the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set and the different working modes corresponding relationship. The IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set of the corresponding number according to the fourth indication information and the second state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource set in the selected SRS resource set according to the SRI in the second indication information, and then according to the precoding The configuration information in the matrix and the selected SRS resource respectively sends the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2.
需要说明的是,IAB节点1根据第四指示信息和第二状态信息选择的SRS resource set中有一个或多个SRS resource,且每个SRS resource只能配置一个port且配置的port号是不同的。IAB节点1会基于预编码矩阵和所选的SRS resource set中的SRS resource中的配置信息,分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值SRS信号。例如,IAB节点1选择的是与时分复用模式对应的SRS resource set,在所述SRS resource set中有4个SRS resource,这4个SRS resource分别配置的port为BP0~BP3,那么IAB节点1会分别通过port BP0~BP3向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。It should be noted that there is one or more SRS resources in the SRS resource set selected by the IAB node 1 according to the fourth indication information and the second state information, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port and the configured port numbers are different . IAB node 1 will send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 based on the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the SRS resource in the selected SRS resource set. For example, IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource set corresponding to the time-division multiplexing mode. There are 4 SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the ports configured for these 4 SRS resources are BP0 to BP3 respectively. SRS signals with weights will be sent to IAB node 2 through ports BP0~BP3 respectively.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的 MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第一种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第二状态信息选择对应字段的SRS resource,并根据所述第二指示信息中的SRI,在所选对应字段的SRS resource中,选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选择的SRS resource内的配置信息和预编码分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。In a possible implementation, if the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources are related to MIMO parameters in different working modes corresponding respectively, and when the configuration mode of the identifier of the SRS resource is the first mode in step S1202, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding field according to the second state information, and according to the second indication information In the SRS resource of the selected corresponding field, select the corresponding SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the configuration information and precoding in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第二种方式时,IAB节点1根据所述第二状态信息对应编号的SRS resource,并根据所述第二指示信息中的SRI,在所选对应编号的SRS resource中,选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据预编码矩阵和所选SRS resource的中的配置信息分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。If the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS resource When the configuration mode of the identification is the second mode in step S1202, the IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource corresponding to the number according to the SRS resource corresponding to the second state information, and according to the SRI in the second indication information. In the resource, select the corresponding SRS resource, and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
若IAB节点1接收到的SRS资源为一个SRS resource set,所述SRS resource set中有多个SRS resource,所述多个SRS resource与不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应,且所述SRS resource的标识的配置方式为步骤S1202中的第三种方式时,IAB节点2向IAB节点1发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集中的SRS resource set的编号与不同工作模式之间的对应关系。IAB节点1根据所述第四指示信息和所述第二状态信息选择对应编号的SRS resource,并根据所述第二指示信息中的SRI在所选的SRS resource(同一个工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource)中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据预编码矩阵和所选的SRS resource中的配置信息,分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值的SRS信号。If the SRS resource received by the IAB node 1 is an SRS resource set, there are multiple SRS resources in the SRS resource set, and the multiple SRS resources correspond to MIMO parameters in different working modes respectively, and the SRS resource When the configuration mode of the identification is the third mode in step S1202, the IAB node 2 sends the fourth indication information to the IAB node 1, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the number of the SRS resource set in the first resource set is the same as the number of the SRS resource set. Correspondence between different working modes. The IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the fourth indication information and the second state information, and selects the SRS resource of the corresponding number according to the SRI in the second indication information (the same working mode may correspond to multiple Select the corresponding SRS resource in the SRS resource), and then send the SRS signal with the weight to the IAB node 2 according to the precoding matrix and the configuration information in the selected SRS resource.
需要说明的是,IAB节点1根据第二状态信息选择的SRS resource,一个工作模式可能对应多个SRS resource,且每个SRS resource只能配置一个port且配置的port号是不同的。IAB节点1会根据所选的每一个SRS resource的信息和计算出的预编码矩阵,分别向IAB节点2发送带有权值SRS信号(比如通过不同的port发送SRS信号)。It should be noted that, for the SRS resource selected by the IAB node 1 according to the second state information, one working mode may correspond to multiple SRS resources, and each SRS resource can only be configured with one port and the configured port numbers are different. IAB node 1 will send SRS signals with weights to IAB node 2 according to the information of each selected SRS resource and the calculated precoding matrix (for example, sending SRS signals through different ports).
步骤S1205:IAB节点1向所述IAB节点2上报第二信息。Step S1205: The IAB node 1 reports the second information to the IAB node 2.
具体地,IAB节点1在根据第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号向IAB节点2发送SRS信号后,会向IAB节点2上报第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。所述第二指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息。当使用所述不可用的SRI所指示的SRS resource中的配置信息,向IAB节点2传输上行信号时,会产生强干扰等问题。通过向IAB节点2发送不可用的SRI的指示信息,给IAB节点2参考,即IAB节点2从SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,不用考虑所述SRI的指示信息所指示的SRS resource,在一定程度上也缩小了IAB节点2查找SRS resource的范围。Specifically, after sending the SRS signal to IAB node 2 according to the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal, IAB node 1 will report second information to IAB node 2, where the second information is used to indicate the different work mode, SRI not available. The second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes. When using the configuration information in the SRS resource indicated by the unavailable SRI to transmit the uplink signal to the IAB node 2, problems such as strong interference will occur. By sending the indication information of the unavailable SRI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set, regardless of the SRS resource indicated by the indication information of the SRI, in the To a certain extent, it also narrows the scope of IAB node 2 to find SRS resources.
不同的工作模式下,可用的port数不同,对于不同的port数,SRI指示的SRS resource也不同。例如,IAB节点的空分复用模式与时分复用模式相比较,可用的port数不同,则对同一SRI的理解也不同。为了避免同一个SRI指示信息指示多个码本中的预编码矩阵,因此,在第一信息中还包括不同工作模式的指示信息,使得所述不同工作模式下不可用的SRI的指示信息指示的SRS resource唯一。In different working modes, the number of available ports is different, and the SRS resource indicated by SRI is also different for different port numbers. For example, when the space division multiplexing mode of an IAB node is compared with the time division multiplexing mode, the number of available ports is different, and the understanding of the same SRI is also different. In order to avoid that the same SRI indication information indicates precoding matrices in multiple codebooks, the first information also includes indication information of different working modes, so that the indication information of SRIs that are unavailable in the different working modes indicates SRS resource is unique.
步骤S1206:IAB节点2基于第二参考信号和MIMO参数的信息,生成DCI信号,并将DCI信号发送给IAB节点1。Step S1206 : the IAB node 2 generates a DCI signal based on the information of the second reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
具体地,IAB节点2接收到IAB节点1发送的第二参考信号,所述第二参考信号为IAB节点1发送的多路SRS信号,用于估计上行信道,获得上行信道的信息,根据所述上行信道的信息和多套MIMO参数选择IAB节点1的DMRS port以及SRS resource。IAB节点2将DMRS port对应的DMRS port indicator和SRS resource对应的SRI等信息放在DCI信号中,将所述DCI信号传输给IAB节点1。Specifically, the IAB node 2 receives the second reference signal sent by the IAB node 1, and the second reference signal is a multi-channel SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, which is used to estimate the uplink channel and obtain the information of the uplink channel. According to the The information of the uplink channel and multiple sets of MIMO parameters select the DMRS port and SRS resource of IAB node 1. The IAB node 2 places the information such as the DMRS port indicator corresponding to the DMRS port and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
步骤S1207:IAB节点1基于DCI信号和预编码矩阵,使用MIMO向IAB节点2传输信号。Step S1207: IAB node 1 transmits a signal to IAB node 2 using MIMO based on the DCI signal and the precoding matrix.
具体地,IAB节点1接收到所述DCI信号后,根据DCI信号中的SRI和DMRS port indicator选择对应的SRS resource和port,使用所述port向IAB节点2传输信号。然后,根据预编码矩阵,IAB节点1赋予所选port待发送的上行信号权值,并将该信号发送给IAB节点2,实现了使用MIMO上行传输带有权值的信号。Specifically, after receiving the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource and port according to the SRI and DMRS port indicator in the DCI signal, and uses the port to transmit the signal to the IAB node 2. Then, according to the precoding matrix, the IAB node 1 assigns the weight of the uplink signal to be sent to the selected port, and sends the signal to the IAB node 2, thus realizing the use of MIMO uplink transmission of the signal with the weight.
本实施例,下级节点(IAB节点1)在向上级节点(IAB节点2)用MIMO传输上行信号之前,先向基站发送多套MIMO参数,所述多套MIMO参数对应的是不同的工作模式。基站接收到下级节点发送的MIMO参数后,配置多套SRS资源,所述SRS资源分别对应不同工作模式。基站将SRS资源发送给下级节点,并将所述SRS资源的信息和MIMO参数的信息发送给上级节点。上级节点向下级节点发送调度指令,下级节点根据所述调度指令中的CSI-RS信号计算预编码矩阵,然后根据指示信息中的SRI选择对应其当前工作模式的SRS资源中的SRS resource,并根据所选择的SRS resource中的配置信息,向上级节点发送SRS信号。在向上级节点发送信号后,下级节点再向上级节点发送当前工作模式对应的不可用的SRI。上级节点根据下级节点发送的SRS信号估计上行信道,获得上行信道的信息,基于所述上行信道的信息、SRS资源以及MIMO参数向下级节点发送DCI信号,下行节点根据DCI信号中的信息选择port和SRS resource,并基于SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵,使用MIMO向上级节点传输信号。In this embodiment, the subordinate node (IAB node 1) sends multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station before transmitting the uplink signal to the superior node (IAB node 2) using MIMO, and the multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes. After receiving the MIMO parameters sent by the subordinate node, the base station configures multiple sets of SRS resources, and the SRS resources respectively correspond to different working modes. The base station sends the SRS resource to the lower node, and sends the information of the SRS resource and the information of the MIMO parameter to the upper node. The upper-level node sends a scheduling instruction to the lower-level node, and the lower-level node calculates the precoding matrix according to the CSI-RS signal in the scheduling instruction, and then selects the SRS resource in the SRS resource corresponding to its current working mode according to the SRI in the instruction information, and according to The configuration information in the selected SRS resource sends an SRS signal to the upper node. After sending the signal to the upper node, the lower node sends the unavailable SRI corresponding to the current working mode to the upper node. The upper-level node estimates the uplink channel according to the SRS signal sent by the lower-level node, obtains the information of the uplink channel, sends the DCI signal to the lower-level node based on the information of the uplink channel, SRS resources and MIMO parameters, and the downlink node selects the port and the lower-level node according to the information in the DCI signal. SRS resource, and based on the configuration information and precoding matrix in the SRS resource, use MIMO to transmit signals to the upper node.
另外,在本实施例中,下级IAB节点可以向上级IAB节点上报不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI,避免了下级IAB节点处于空分复用模式或者全双工模式时,上级IAB节点调度下级IAB节点使用造成强干扰的SRS resource。同时,IAB节点和基站对不同工作模式的SRI的理解也有所不同。In addition, in this embodiment, the lower-level IAB node can report the unavailable SRIs in different working modes to the upper-level IAB node, so as to avoid the upper-level IAB node scheduling the lower-level IAB node when the lower-level IAB node is in the space division multiplexing mode or the full-duplex mode. IAB nodes use SRS resources that cause strong interference. At the same time, IAB nodes and base stations have different understandings of SRI in different working modes.
请参见图13,图13是本申请实施例提供的一种MIMO上行链路的传输流程图。图13是本申请实施例提供了一种第一节点使用MIMO进行上行链路传输的方法,不同于图10、图11和图12的实施例,第一节点的上级节点为网络设备。图13以第一节点为IAB节点1,网络设备为基站为例,IAB节点1使用MIMO向基站进行上行链路的传输流程如下:Referring to FIG. 13 , FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a MIMO uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application. FIG. 13 is a method for a first node to perform uplink transmission using MIMO provided by an embodiment of the present application. Different from the embodiments of FIG. 10 , FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 , the upper node of the first node is a network device. Figure 13 takes the first node as the IAB node 1 and the network device as the base station as an example. The IAB node 1 uses MIMO to perform uplink transmission to the base station as follows:
步骤S1301:IAB节点1将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给基站。Step S1301: The IAB node 1 reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station.
具体地,与图11和图12的实施例类似,IAB节点1使用MIMO向基站传输信号之前,要向基站上报多套不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,以便基站根据其上报的多套MIMO参数配置相应的SRS资源。Specifically, similar to the embodiments in FIGS. 11 and 12 , before using MIMO to transmit signals to the base station, the IAB node 1 needs to report multiple sets of MIMO parameters in different working modes to the base station, so that the base station can configure the base station according to the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by it. Corresponding SRS resource.
步骤S1302:基站接收IAB节点1上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数,并根据所述MIMO参数配置第一资源集,并将所述第一资源集发送给所述IAB节点1;将所述第一资源集的信息和MIMO参数信息发送给IAB节点2。Step S1302: The base station receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the IAB node 1, configures a first resource set according to the MIMO parameters, and sends the first resource set to the IAB node 1; The information of the first resource set and the MIMO parameter information are sent to the IAB node 2.
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站根据IAB节点1上报的MIMO参数配置第一资源集。基站配置第一资源集的过程请参考步骤S1002,此处不再赘述。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a codebook, the base station configures the first resource set according to the MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 . For the process of configuring the first resource set by the base station, please refer to step S1002, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站根据IAB节点1上报的MIMO参数配置第一资源集。基站配置第一资源集的过程请参考步骤S1202,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner, the base station configures the first resource set according to the MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 . For the process of configuring the first resource set by the base station, please refer to step S1202, which will not be repeated here.
步骤S1303:基站向IAB节点1发送指示信息。Step S1303: The base station sends indication information to the IAB node 1.
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站向IAB节点1发送第一指示信息,用于指示IAB节点1向基站发送SRS信号;其中,所述第一指示信息包括一个或多个SRI,用于指示IAB节点1选择对应的SRS resouce来发送SRS信号。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a codebook, the base station sends the first indication information to the IAB node 1, which is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to send the SRS signal to the base station; An indication message includes one or more SRIs, and is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resouce to send the SRS signal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站向IAB节点1发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息包括一个或多个SRI和基站根据IAB节点1所处的工作模式向IAB节点1发送与IAB节点1所处工作模式相对应的第一信道状态参考信号,所述第一信道状态参考信号为CSI-RS信号。其中,所述SRI用于指示IAB节点1选择对应的SRS resource向基站发送SRS信号;所述CSI-RS信号用于IAB节点1估计下行信道。In a possible implementation manner, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner, the base station sends second indication information to the IAB node 1, where the second indication information includes one or more Each SRI and the base station send a first channel state reference signal corresponding to the working mode of the IAB node 1 to the IAB node 1 according to the working mode of the IAB node 1, where the first channel state reference signal is a CSI-RS signal. Wherein, the SRI is used to instruct the IAB node 1 to select the corresponding SRS resource to send the SRS signal to the base station; the CSI-RS signal is used for the IAB node 1 to estimate the downlink channel.
步骤S1304:IAB节点1根据指示信息向基站发送参考信号。Step S1304: The IAB node 1 sends a reference signal to the base station according to the indication information.
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,所述参考信号为第一参考信号,IAB节点1接收到基站发送的指示信息为第一指示信息,基站接收到所述第一指示信息后,根据IAB节点1第一状态信息选择对应的SRS资源,并根据所述第一指示信息中的SRI从所选的SRS资源中选择相应的SRS resource,根据所选择的SRS resource中的配置信息向基站发送SRS信号。IAB节点1根据第一状态信息选择SRS资源,并根据第一指示信息选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向基站发送SRS信号的过程请参考步骤S1004,此处不再赘述。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a codebook, the reference signal is the first reference signal, and the indication information received by the IAB node 1 from the base station is the first indication information, and the base station receives the first indication information. After reaching the first indication information, select the corresponding SRS resource according to the first state information of the IAB node 1, and select the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resources according to the SRI in the first indication information, and select the corresponding SRS resource according to the selected SRS resource. The configuration information in the SRS resource sends an SRS signal to the base station. The IAB node 1 selects the SRS resource according to the first state information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the first indication information, and then sends the SRS signal to the base station according to the configuration information in the selected SRS resource. Please refer to step S1004, here is not Repeat.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,所述参考信号为第二参考信号,IAB节点1接收到基站发送的指示信息为第二指示信息,基站接收到所述第二指示信息后根据所述指示信息中的CSI-RS信号估计下行信道,得到下行信道信息,根据下行信道信息确定上行信道信息,得到上行信道矩阵。IAB节点1对上行信道矩阵进行运算处理,得到预编码矩阵。IAB节点1根据第二状态信息选择对应的SRS资源,根据第二指示信息从所选的SRS资源中选择对应的SRS resource,然后根据所选的SRS resource中的配置信息和预编码矩阵向基站发送带有权值的SRS信号。IAB节点1计算预编码矩阵的过程以及根据第二状态信息选择相应的SRS资源,根据所述第二指示信息从所选的SRS资源中选择对应的SRS resource,并根据预编码矩阵和所选的SRS resource中的配置信息向基站发送带有权值的SRS信号的过程请参考步骤S1024,此 处不再赘述。In a possible implementation, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner, the reference signal is the second reference signal, and the indication information received by the IAB node 1 from the base station is: For the second indication information, after receiving the second indication information, the base station estimates the downlink channel according to the CSI-RS signal in the indication information to obtain downlink channel information, and determines the uplink channel information according to the downlink channel information to obtain the uplink channel matrix. The IAB node 1 performs arithmetic processing on the uplink channel matrix to obtain a precoding matrix. The IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resource according to the second indication information, and then sends to the base station according to the configuration information and the precoding matrix in the selected SRS resource SRS signal with weights. The IAB node 1 calculates the precoding matrix and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the second state information, selects the corresponding SRS resource from the selected SRS resources according to the second indication information, and selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the precoding matrix and the selected SRS resource. The configuration information in the SRS resource sends the SRS signal with the weight to the base station, please refer to step S1024, which will not be repeated here.
步骤S1305:IAB节点1向基站上报信息。Step S1305: The IAB node 1 reports information to the base station.
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,IAB节点1向基站上报的信息为第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。所述第一指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息。所述第一指示信息所指示的预编码矩阵可能会对处于当前工作模式的IAB节点1向基站传输的上行信号,产生强干扰。通过向基站发送不可用的TPMI的指示信息,给基站参考,即基站从码本中选择预编码矩阵,不用考虑所述TPMI的指示信息所指示的预编码矩阵,在一定程度上也缩小了基站查找预编码矩阵的范围。所述第一信息的相关介绍请参考步骤S1005,此处不再赘述。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a codebook, the information reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station is the first information, and the first information is used to indicate that in the different working modes, Unavailable TPMI. The first indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes. The precoding matrix indicated by the first indication information may cause strong interference to the uplink signal transmitted by the IAB node 1 in the current working mode to the base station. By sending the indication information of the unavailable TPMI to the base station for reference, that is, the base station selects the precoding matrix from the codebook without considering the precoding matrix indicated by the indication information of the TPMI, which reduces the size of the base station to a certain extent. Find the range of the precoding matrix. For the related introduction of the first information, please refer to step S1005, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,IAB节点1向基站上报的信息为第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。所述第二指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息。所述不可用的SRI所指示的SRS resource中的配置信息,向IAB节点2传输上行信号时,会产生强干扰等问题。通过向IAB节点2发送不可用的SRI的指示信息,给IAB节点2参考,即IAB节点2从SRS resource set中选择对应的SRS resource,不用考虑所述SRI的指示信息所指示的SRS resource,在一定程度上也缩小了IAB节点2查找SRS resource的范围。所述第二信息的相关介绍请参考步骤S1205,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner, the information reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station is second information, and the second information is used to indicate SRIs that are not available in the different working modes. The second indication information includes indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes. The configuration information in the SRS resource indicated by the unavailable SRI will cause problems such as strong interference when transmitting the uplink signal to the IAB node 2. By sending the indication information of the unavailable SRI to the IAB node 2, it is referred to the IAB node 2, that is, the IAB node 2 selects the corresponding SRS resource from the SRS resource set, regardless of the SRS resource indicated by the indication information of the SRI, in the To a certain extent, it also narrows the scope of IAB node 2 to find SRS resources. For the related introduction of the second information, please refer to step S1205, which will not be repeated here.
步骤S1306:基站根据参考信号和MIMO参数的信息,生成DCI信号,并将DCI信号发送给IAB节点1。Step S1306 : the base station generates a DCI signal according to the information of the reference signal and the MIMO parameter, and sends the DCI signal to the IAB node 1 .
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站收到IAB节点1发送的SRS信号后,通过SRS信号估计上行信道,获取上行信道的信息。由于基站在配置的SRS资源后,将其配置的SRS资源的信息以及IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数的信息发送给基站,基站基于其获得的上行信道的信息和MIMO参数,为基站选择最合适的预编码矩阵。若步骤S1003中,基站发送的指示信息中的SRI为多个时,基站为IAB节点1选择最合适SRS resource。然后基站将所选的预编码矩阵对应的TPMI和SRS resource对应的SRI等信息放在DCI信号中,将所述DCI信号传输给IAB节点1。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on the codebook, after receiving the SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, the base station estimates the uplink channel through the SRS signal, and obtains the information of the uplink channel. After the base station configures the SRS resources, it sends the information of the configured SRS resources and the information of the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1 to the base station. suitable precoding matrix. If in step S1003, there are multiple SRIs in the indication information sent by the base station, the base station selects the most suitable SRS resource for the IAB node 1. Then the base station puts information such as the TPMI corresponding to the selected precoding matrix and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,基站接收到IAB节点1发送的多路SRS信号,用于估计上行信道,获得上行信道的信息,根据所述上行信道的信息和多套MIMO参数选择IAB节点1的DMRS port以及SRS resource。基站将DMRS port对应的DMRS port indicator和SRS resource对应的SRI等信息放在DCI信号中,将所述DCI信号传输给IAB节点1。In a possible implementation, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook method, the base station receives the multi-channel SRS signal sent by the IAB node 1, which is used to estimate the uplink channel and obtain the uplink Channel information, select the DMRS port and SRS resource of IAB node 1 according to the uplink channel information and multiple sets of MIMO parameters. The base station places the information such as the DMRS port indicator corresponding to the DMRS port and the SRI corresponding to the SRS resource in the DCI signal, and transmits the DCI signal to the IAB node 1.
步骤S1307:IAB节点1根据DCI信号,使用MIMO向基站上行传输信号。Step S1307: The IAB node 1 transmits the signal to the base station uplink by using MIMO according to the DCI signal.
具体地,当IAB节点1基于码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,IAB节点1接收到所述DCI信号后,根据DCI信号中的SRI和TPMI选择IAB节点1当前所处的工作模式所对应的SRS resource和预编码矩阵,并根据所选择的SRS resource中配置的port,IAB节点1选择对应的port,根据所选的预编码矩阵,IAB节点1给所选port发送的信号 加上权值,将加权后的信号通过所选port传输给基站,实现了使用MIMO向基站传输信号。IAB节点1向基站传输信号的具体过程请参考步骤S1007,此处不再赘述。Specifically, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on the codebook, after receiving the DCI signal, the IAB node 1 selects the current job of the IAB node 1 according to the SRI and TPMI in the DCI signal. The SRS resource and precoding matrix corresponding to the mode, and according to the port configured in the selected SRS resource, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding port, and according to the selected precoding matrix, the IAB node 1 adds the signal sent by the selected port. With the upper weight value, the weighted signal is transmitted to the base station through the selected port, which realizes the use of MIMO to transmit the signal to the base station. For the specific process of the IAB node 1 transmitting the signal to the base station, please refer to step S1007, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当IAB节点1基于非码本的方式使用MIMO进行上行链路的传输时,IAB节点1接收到所述DCI信号后,根据DCI信号中的SRI和DMRS port indicator选择对应的SRS resource和port。然后,根据预编码矩阵,IAB节点1赋予所选port待发送的上行信号权值,并将该信号发送给基站,实现了使用MIMO上行传输信号。IAB节点1向基站传输信号的具体过程请参考步骤S1207,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation, when the IAB node 1 uses MIMO for uplink transmission based on a non-codebook manner, after the IAB node 1 receives the DCI signal, the Select the corresponding SRS resource and port. Then, according to the precoding matrix, the IAB node 1 assigns the weight of the uplink signal to be sent to the selected port, and sends the signal to the base station, thereby realizing the use of MIMO uplink transmission signal. For the specific process of the IAB node 1 transmitting the signal to the base station, please refer to step S1207, which will not be repeated here.
本实施例,当IAB节点1的上级节点为基站时,与图10和图12的实施例类似,IAB节点1在使用MIMO向基站传输信号之前,要先向基站上报多套MIMO参数,所述多套MIMO参数分别对应不同的工作模式。基站在接收到IAB节点1上报的多套MIMO参数后,配置相应的SRS资源。IAB节点1根据当前所处的工作模式,选择对应的SRS资源,并使用所选的SRS资源使用MIMO向基站传输信号。通过本实施例所述的方法,IAB节点1根据当前所处的工作模式选择对应的SRS资源,有效避免了强干扰、部分面板不可用等问题,提高了信号的传输质量。In this embodiment, when the upper-level node of the IAB node 1 is a base station, similar to the embodiments in FIG. 10 and FIG. 12 , before using MIMO to transmit signals to the base station, the IAB node 1 must first report multiple sets of MIMO parameters to the base station. The multiple sets of MIMO parameters correspond to different working modes respectively. After receiving the multiple sets of MIMO parameters reported by the IAB node 1, the base station configures corresponding SRS resources. The IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the current working mode, and uses the selected SRS resource to transmit a signal to the base station by using MIMO. With the method described in this embodiment, the IAB node 1 selects the corresponding SRS resource according to the current working mode, which effectively avoids problems such as strong interference and unavailability of some panels, and improves the signal transmission quality.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点上报自身的硬件能力或状态,包括例如不同模式下的可用天线数,天线port数,面板panel数,天线间和/或面板间的相互关系。并且,IAB MT上报时分复用模式下的MIMO参数。基站根据IAB上报的硬件能力或状态,和时分复用模式下的MIMO参数,确定IAB节点不同工作模式下的相应的资源集,用于不同模式下的MIMO传输。其中,确定/指示不同模式下使用的参考信号资源的方法,与本申请其他实施例类似,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the IAB node reports its own hardware capability or status, including, for example, the number of available antennas in different modes, the number of antenna ports, the number of panels, and the relationship between antennas and/or panels. In addition, the IAB MT reports the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode. The base station determines the corresponding resource sets of the IAB node in different working modes according to the hardware capability or state reported by the IAB and the MIMO parameters in the time division multiplexing mode, which are used for MIMO transmission in different modes. The method for determining/indicating reference signal resources used in different modes is similar to other embodiments of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
上述详细阐述了本申请实施例的方法,下面提供本实施例的相关装置。The methods of the embodiments of the present application are described in detail above, and the related apparatuses of the present embodiments are provided below.
请参见图14,图14是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置14可以为上述方法实施例中的第一节点,所述确定传输参数装置14可以包括上报单元1401、接收单元1402,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 14 may be the first node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 14 It may include a reporting unit 1401 and a receiving unit 1402, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
上报单元1401,用于将不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备;A reporting unit 1401, configured to report MIMO parameters in different working modes to a network device;
接收单元1402,用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The receiving unit 1402 is configured to receive a first resource set sent by the network device, wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置14还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device 14 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
第一指示信息接收单元,用于所述接收单元接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集之后,接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息;a first indication information receiving unit, configured to receive the first indication information sent by the second node after the receiving unit receives the first resource set sent by the network device;
第一参考信号资源调用单元,用于基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源;a first reference signal resource calling unit, configured to use the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
第一参考信号发送单元,用于向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号;a first reference signal sending unit, configured to send a first reference signal to the second node;
第一信息上报单元,用于向所述第二节点上报第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。The first information reporting unit is configured to report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第一参考信号资源调用单元,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the first reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
第一参考信号资源选择单元,用于根据第一状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参 考信号资源。A first reference signal resource selection unit, configured to select a first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the first state information.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置14,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device 14 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
第二指示信息接收单元,用于接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息;a second indication information receiving unit, configured to receive the second indication information sent by the second node;
第一信道状态参考信号接收单元,用于接收第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal receiving unit, configured to receive the first channel state reference signal;
第一信道状态参考信号调用单元,用于使用所述第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal calling unit, configured to use the first channel state reference signal;
第二参考信号资源调用单元,用于基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源;a second reference signal resource calling unit, configured to use the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
第二信息上报单元,用于向所述第二节点上报第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。The second information reporting unit is configured to report the second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述第二参考信号资源调用单元,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the second reference signal resource invoking unit further includes:
第二参考信号资源选择单元,用于根据第二状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。The second reference signal resource selection unit is configured to select the first reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置14中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第一节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the transmission parameter determining apparatus 14 may also correspond to the execution steps of the first node in the embodiment of the transmission parameter determining method, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图15,图15是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置15可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备,所述确定传输参数装置15可以包括接收单元1501、资源配置单元1502和发送单元1503,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 15 may be the network equipment in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 15 may be It includes a receiving unit 1501, a resource configuration unit 1502 and a sending unit 1503, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
接收单元1501,用于接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数;A receiving unit 1501, configured to receive the MIMO parameters reported by the first node under different working modes;
资源配置单元1502,用于配置第一资源集;a resource configuration unit 1502, configured to configure a first resource set;
发送单元1503,用于将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The sending unit 1503 is configured to send the first resource set to the first node, wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述资源配置单元1502,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the resource configuration unit 1502 further includes:
标识配置单元,用于若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源的集合分别配置对应的标识;an identification configuration unit, configured to respectively configure corresponding identifications for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources;
若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源分别配置对应的标识。If the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
在一种可能实现的方式中,所述确定传输参数装置15,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the device 15 for determining transmission parameters further includes:
信息发送单元,用于所述资源配置单元配置第一资源集之后,向第二节点发送第一资源集的信息。An information sending unit, configured to send the information of the first resource set to the second node after the resource configuration unit configures the first resource set.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置15中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中网络设备的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that the description of each unit in the transmission parameter determining apparatus 15 may also correspond to the execution steps of the network device in the embodiment of the transmission parameter determining method, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图16,图16是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置16可以为上述方法实施例中的第二节点,所述确定传输参数装置16可以包括第一指示信息发送单元1601、第一参考信号接收单元1602和第一信息接收单元1603,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 may be the second node in the above method embodiments. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 It may include a first indication information sending unit 1601, a first reference signal receiving unit 1602 and a first information receiving unit 1603, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
第一指示信息发送单元1601,用于向第一节点发送第一指示信息;a first indication information sending unit 1601, configured to send the first indication information to the first node;
第一参考信号接收单元1602,用于接收所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,发送的第一参考信号;a first reference signal receiving unit 1602, configured to receive a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
第一信息接收单元1603,用于接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。The first information receiving unit 1603 is configured to receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置16中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第二节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 16 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图17,图17是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置17可以为上述方法实施例中的第二节点,所述确定传输参数装置17可以包括第二指示信息发送单元1701、第一信道状态参考信号发送单元1702、第二参考信号接收单元1703和第二信息接收单元1704,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 It may include a second indication information sending unit 1701, a first channel state reference signal sending unit 1702, a second reference signal receiving unit 1703 and a second information receiving unit 1704, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
第二指示信息发送单元1701,用于向第一节点发送第二指示信息;The second indication information sending unit 1701 is configured to send the second indication information to the first node;
第一信道状态参考信号发送单元1702,用于向第一节点发送第一信道状态参考信号;a first channel state reference signal sending unit 1702, configured to send a first channel state reference signal to the first node;
第二参考信号接收单元1703,用于接收所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,发送的第二参考信号;The second reference signal receiving unit 1703 is configured to receive, based on the second indication information, the first channel state reference signal sent by the first node using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resources in the first resource set. Two reference signals;
第二信息接收单元1704,用于接收所述第一节点上报的第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。The second information receiving unit 1704 is configured to receive the second information reported by the first node, wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置17中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第二节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 17 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图18,图18是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置可以为上述方法实施例中的第一节点,所述确定传输参数装置18可以包括存储器1801、通信模块1802和处理器1803,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters may be the first node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 18 may be It includes a memory 1801, a communication module 1802 and a processor 1803, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
存储器1801用于存储程序代码。The memory 1801 is used to store program codes.
通信模块1802用于执行如下步骤:The communication module 1802 is used to perform the following steps:
将在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备;Report the MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device;
接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。A first resource set sent by the network device is received; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after receiving the first resource set configured by the network device, further include:
接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息。The first indication information sent by the second node is received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:在处理器1803基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源之后,向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after the processor 1803 uses the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information, send a message to the second node A first reference signal is sent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号之后,向所述第二节点上报第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after sending the first reference signal to the second node, report the first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used for Indicates the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after receiving the first resource set configured by the network device, further include:
接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号。The second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node are received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:在处理器1803基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源之后,向所述第二节点发送第二参考信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: use the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal in the first resource set in the processor 1803 based on the second indication information After the resource, a second reference signal is sent to the second node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1802,还用于:向所述第二节点发送第二参考信号之后,向所述第二节点上报第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1802 is further configured to: after sending the second reference signal to the second node, report second information to the second node; wherein the second information is used for Indicates the unavailable SRI in the different working modes.
处理器1803用于调用存储器存储的程序代码执行如下步骤:The processor 1803 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
在通信模块1802接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息之后,基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。After the communication module 1802 receives the first indication information sent by the second node, the first reference signal resource in the first resource set is used based on the first indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器1802,还用于:在通信模块1802接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号之后,基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源。In a possible implementation manner, the processor 1802 is further configured to: after the communication module 1802 receives the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node, based on the second indication information, Using the first channel state reference signal and second reference signal resources in the first resource set.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置18中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第一节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 18 may also correspond to the execution steps of the first node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图19,图19是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,所述确定传输参数装置可以为上述方法实施例中的网络设备,确定传输参数装置19可以包括存储器1901、通信模块1902和处理器1903,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters may be a network device in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 19 may include a memory 1901. , the communication module 1902 and the processor 1903, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
存储器1901用于存储程序代码。The memory 1901 is used to store program codes.
通信模块1902用于执行如下步骤:The communication module 1902 is used to perform the following steps:
接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数。Receive MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1902,还用于:在处理器1903配置第一资源集后,将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1902 is further configured to: after the processor 1903 configures the first resource set, send the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource A set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different operating modes respectively.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块1902,还用于:在处理器1903配置第一资源集后,向第二节点发送第一资源集的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 1902 is further configured to: after the processor 1903 configures the first resource set, send the information of the first resource set to the second node.
处理器1903用于调用存储器存储的程序代码执行如下步骤:The processor 1903 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
在通信模块1902接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数后,配置第一资源集。After the communication module 1902 receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node, the first resource set is configured.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器1903配置第一资源集还包括:若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源的集合分别配置对应的标识;In a possible implementation manner, configuring the first resource set by the processor 1903 further includes: if the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, a set of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set Sets are configured with corresponding identifiers respectively;
若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源分别配置对应的标识。If the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, corresponding identifiers are respectively configured for multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置19中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法 的实施例中网络设备的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 19 may also correspond to the execution steps of the network equipment in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图20,图20是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,确定传输参数装置20可以为上述方法实施例中的第二节点,确定传输参数装置20可以包括存储器2001、通信模块2002和处理器2003,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 20 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 20 may include a memory 2001. , the communication module 2002 and the processor 2003, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
存储器2001用于存储程序代码。The memory 2001 is used to store program codes.
通信模块2002用于执行如下步骤:The communication module 2002 is used to perform the following steps:
接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。Information about the first resource set sent by the network device is received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2002,还用于:在接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息之后,向第一节点发送第一指示信息。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after receiving the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, send the first indication information to the first node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2002,还用于:向第一节点发送第一指示信息之后,接收第一节点发送的第一参考信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after sending the first indication information to the first node, receive the first reference signal sent by the first node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2002,还用于:在接收第一参考信号之后,接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2002 is further configured to: after receiving the first reference signal, receive first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the different TPMI not available in work mode.
处理器2003用于调用存储器存储的程序代码执行如下步骤:The processor 2003 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
在通信模块2002接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息之后,生成第一指示信息。After the communication module 2002 receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, it generates first indication information.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置20中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第二节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that the description of each unit in the apparatus 20 for determining transmission parameters may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
请参见图21,图21是本申请实施例提供的一种确定传输参数装置的结构示意图,确定传输参数装置21可以为上述方法实施例中的第二节点,确定传输参数装置21可以包括存储器2101、通信模块2102和处理器2103,其中,各个单元的详细描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining transmission parameters provided by an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may be the second node in the above method embodiments, and the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may include a memory 2101. , the communication module 2102 and the processor 2103, wherein the detailed description of each unit is as follows:
存储器2101用于存储程序代码。The memory 2101 is used to store program codes.
通信模块2102用于执行如下步骤:The communication module 2102 is used to perform the following steps:
接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。Information about the first resource set sent by the network device is received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2102,还用于:在接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息之后,向第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after receiving the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, send the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2102,还用于:向第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号之后,接收第一节点发送的第二参考信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after sending the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node, receive the second reference signal sent by the first node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信模块2102,还用于:在接收的第二参考信号之后,接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI。In a possible implementation manner, the communication module 2102 is further configured to: after receiving the second reference signal, receive the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the Unavailable TPMI in different working modes.
处理器2103用于调用存储器存储的程序代码执行如下步骤:The processor 2103 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory to perform the following steps:
在通信模块2002接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息之后,生成第二指示信息。After the communication module 2002 receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device, second indication information is generated.
可以理解的是,确定传输参数装置21中各个单元的描述还可以对应确定传输参数方法的实施例中第二节点的执行步骤,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, the description of each unit in the apparatus for determining transmission parameters 21 may also correspond to the execution steps of the second node in the embodiment of the method for determining transmission parameters, which will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时,实现上述实施例及其各种可能的实现方式中的网络数据测量方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, implements the network in the foregoing embodiment and various possible implementation manners thereof Data measurement methods.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序,该计算机程序包括指令,当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得采集点网络设备可以执行上述实施例及其各种可能的实现方式中采集点网络设备所执行的流程、或第二网络设备可以执行上述实施例及其各种可能的实现方式中第二网络设备所执行的流程、使得服务器可以执行上述实施例及其各种可能的实现方式中服务器所执行的流程。The embodiments of the present application provide a computer program, the computer program includes instructions, when the computer program is executed by a computer, so that the network device of the collection point can execute the network device of the collection point in the above embodiment and its various possible implementation manners The executed process, or the second network device can execute the process executed by the second network device in the foregoing embodiment and its various possible implementations, so that the server can execute the server in the foregoing embodiment and its various possible implementations. the process performed.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持采集点网络设备实现上述实施例及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能、或第二网络设备实现上述实施例及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能、或服务器实现上述实施例及其各种可能方式中的方法所涉及的功能。An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, configured to support a network device of a collection point to implement the functions involved in the methods in the foregoing embodiments and various possible manners, or a second network device to implement the foregoing The functions involved in the methods in the embodiments and their various possible manners, or the server implements the functions involved in the methods in the above-mentioned embodiments and their various possible manners.
在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器用于保存采集点网络设备或第二网络设备或服务器必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其它分立器件。In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing necessary program instructions and data of the network device of the collection point or the second network device or the server. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
需要说明的是,上述实施例中的存储器,可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备,随机存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)或其它光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质,但不限于于此。存储器可以是独立存在,通过总线于处理器相连接。存储器可以和处理器集成在一起。It should be noted that the memory in the above-mentioned embodiments may be a read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or Other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, and can also be Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM ) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or capable of carrying or storing data in the form of instructions or data structures desired program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through a bus. The memory can be integrated with the processor.
上述实施例中的处理器,可以是通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制以上方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor in the above-mentioned embodiment may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the above program programs. circuit.
对于前述各方法实施例,为了简单描述,故将其都表达为一系列的动作组合,但是本领域的技术人员应该知悉,本申请并不受所描述的动作顺序的限制,因为依据本申请,某些步骤可能可以采用其它顺序或者同时进行。其次,本领域技术人员也应该知悉,说明书中所描述的实施例均属于优选实施例,所涉及的动作和模块并不一定是本申请所必须的。在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置,可通过其它方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如上述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。For the foregoing method embodiments, for the sake of simple description, they are all expressed as a series of action combinations, but those skilled in the art should know that the present application is not limited by the described action sequence, because according to the present application, Certain steps may be performed in other orders or simultaneously. Secondly, those skilled in the art should also know that the embodiments described in the specification are all preferred embodiments, and the actions and modules involved are not necessarily required by the present application. In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the above-mentioned units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated. to another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
上述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者不是也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,既可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described above as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may or may not be physical units, and may be located in one place or distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
上述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读存储介质中。基于这样理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以为个人计算机、服务器或者网络设备等,具体可以是计算机设备中的处理器)执行本申请各个实施例上述方法的全部或部分步骤。其中,前述的存储介质可包括:U盘、移动硬盘、磁碟、光盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或者随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the above-mentioned integrated units are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of software in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc., specifically a processor in the computer device) to execute all or part of the steps of the foregoing methods in various embodiments of the present application. Wherein, the aforementioned storage medium may include: U disk, mobile hard disk, magnetic disk, optical disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or random access memory (random access memory, RAM) and other various programs that can store program codes medium.
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。As mentioned above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, but not to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art should understand that: The technical solutions described in the embodiments are modified, or some technical features thereof are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions deviate from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种确定传输参数的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining transmission parameters, comprising:
    第一节点将其在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数上报给网络设备;The first node reports its MIMO parameters in different working modes to the network device;
    所述第一节点接收所述网络设备发送的第一资源集;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The first node receives a first resource set sent by the network device; wherein, the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the MIMO parameters in different working modes include:
    所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板的数量。The number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述多个参考信号资源的集合与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;其中,每个参考信号资源的集合包括多个参考信号资源,同一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源功能相同;或者The method according to claim 1, wherein the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of multiple reference signal resources corresponds to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively; Wherein, each set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
    所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合包括多种类型的参考信号资源,所述多种类型的参考信号资源分别与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数对应;其中,每种类型的参考信号资源包括一个或多个参考信号资源。The first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding; wherein, each type of reference signal resources includes one or more reference signal resources.
  4. 如权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein after the first node receives the first resource set configured by the network device, the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点接收所述第二节点发送的第一指示信息;receiving, by the first node, the first indication information sent by the second node;
    所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,向所述第二节点发送第一参考信号;sending, by the first node, a first reference signal to the second node by using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
    所述第一节点向所述第二节点上报第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI;The first node reports first information to the second node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。The first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述使用所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源包括:The method of claim 4, wherein the using the first reference signal resources in the first resource set comprises:
    根据第一状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源。The first reference signal resource in the first resource set is selected according to the first state information.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一状态信息为:The method of claim 5, wherein the first state information is:
    所述第一节点的不同工作模式对应的上行定时信息;或者Uplink timing information corresponding to different working modes of the first node; or
    所述第一节点的DU功能模块和MT功能模块的时频资源、调度信息。Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
  7. 如权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点接收所述网络设备配置的第一资源集之后,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein after the first node receives the first resource set configured by the network device, the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点接收所述第二节点发送的第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号;receiving, by the first node, the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal sent by the second node;
    所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,向所述第二节点发送第二参考信号;The first node sends a second reference signal to the second node by using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the second indication information;
    所述第一节点向所述第二节点上报第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI;The first node reports second information to the second node; wherein, the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。The first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源包括:The method of claim 7, wherein the using the first channel state reference signal and the second reference signal resource in the first resource set comprises:
    使用所述第一信道状态参考信号,以及根据第二状态信息选择所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源。using the first channel state reference signal, and selecting a second reference signal resource in the first resource set according to the second state information.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二状态信息为:The method of claim 8, wherein the second state information is:
    所述第一节点的不同工作模式对应的上行定时信息;或者Uplink timing information corresponding to different working modes of the first node; or
    所述第一节点的DU功能模块和MT功能模块的时频资源、调度信息。Time-frequency resources and scheduling information of the DU function module and the MT function module of the first node.
  10. 一种确定传输参数的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining transmission parameters, comprising:
    网络设备接收第一节点上报的、在不同工作模式下的MIMO参数;The network device receives the MIMO parameters in different working modes reported by the first node;
    所述网络设备配置第一资源集,并将所述第一资源集发送给所述第一节点;其中,所述第一资源集包括与不同工作模式分别对应的参考信号资源。The network device configures a first resource set, and sends the first resource set to the first node; wherein the first resource set includes reference signal resources corresponding to different working modes respectively.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数包括:The method of claim 10, wherein the MIMO parameters in different working modes include:
    所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板的数量。The number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  12. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述多个参考信号资源的集合与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;其中,每个参考信号资源的集合包括多个参考信号资源,同一个参考信号资源的集合中的参考信号资源功能相同;或者The method according to claim 10, wherein the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, and the set of multiple reference signal resources corresponds to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes respectively; Wherein, each set of reference signal resources includes multiple reference signal resources, and the reference signal resources in the same set of reference signal resources have the same function; or
    所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述参考信号资源的集合包括多种类型的参考信号资源,所述多种类型的参考信号资源分别与所述不同工作模式下的MIMO参数分别对应;每种类型的参考信号资源包括一个或多个参考信号资源。The first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the set of reference signal resources includes multiple types of reference signal resources, and the multiple types of reference signal resources are respectively related to the MIMO parameters in the different working modes. Corresponding respectively; each type of reference signal resource includes one or more reference signal resources.
  13. 如权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备配置第一资源集还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein configuring the first resource set by the network device further comprises:
    若所述第一资源集为多个参考信号资源的集合,所述网络设备为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源的集合分别配置对应的标识;If the first resource set is a set of multiple reference signal resources, the network device configures corresponding identifiers for the sets of multiple reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively;
    若所述第一资源集为一个参考信号资源的集合,所述网络设备为所述第一资源集中的多个参考信号资源分别配置对应的标识。If the first resource set is a set of reference signal resources, the network device configures corresponding identifiers for a plurality of reference signal resources in the first resource set respectively.
  14. 如权利要求10-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备配置第一资源集之后,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-13, wherein after the network device configures the first resource set, the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向第二节点发送第一资源集的信息。The network device sends the information of the first resource set to the second node.
  15. 一种确定传输参数的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining transmission parameters, comprising:
    第二节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息;The second node sends the first indication information to the first node;
    所述第二节点接收所述第一节点基于所述第一指示信息,使用第一资源集中的第一参考信号资源,发送的第一参考信号;receiving, by the second node, a first reference signal sent by the first node using the first reference signal resource in the first resource set based on the first indication information;
    所述第二节点接收所述第一节点上报的第一信息;其中,所述第一信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI;receiving, by the second node, the first information reported by the first node; wherein the first information is used to indicate the unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。The first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  16. 如权利要求4或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的TPMI的指示信息;The method according to claim 4 or 15, wherein the first indication information comprises indication information of the different working modes and indication information of unavailable TPMI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  17. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二节点向第一节点发送第一指示信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 15, wherein before the second node sends the first indication information to the first node, the method further comprises:
    所述第二节点接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。The second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
  18. 一种确定传输参数的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining transmission parameters, comprising:
    第二节点向第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号;The second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node;
    所述第二节点接收所述第一节点基于所述第二指示信息,使用所述第一信道状态参考信号和所述第一资源集中的第二参考信号资源,发送的第二参考信号;receiving, by the second node, a second reference signal sent by the first node based on the second indication information using the first channel state reference signal and second reference signal resources in the first resource set;
    所述第二节点接收所述第一节点上报的第二信息;其中,所述第二信息用于指示所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI;receiving, by the second node, the second information reported by the first node; wherein the second information is used to indicate the unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的下游节点。The first node is a downstream node of the second node.
  19. 如权利要求7或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息包括所述不同工作模式的指示信息和所述不同工作模式下、不可用的SRI的指示信息;The method according to claim 7 or 18, wherein the second indication information comprises indication information of the different working modes and indication information of an unavailable SRI in the different working modes;
    其中,所述不同工作模式的指示信息包括:所述不同工作模式下的可用端口数量、可用端口之间的关系信息、可用面板数量。The indication information of the different working modes includes: the number of available ports in the different working modes, the relationship information between the available ports, and the number of available panels.
  20. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二节点向所述第一节点发送第二指示信息和第一信道状态参考信号之前,还包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein before the second node sends the second indication information and the first channel state reference signal to the first node, the method further comprises:
    所述第二节点接收网络设备发送的所述第一资源集的信息。The second node receives the information of the first resource set sent by the network device.
  21. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第一节点,包括用于执行如权利要求1-9或权利要求16或权利要求19任意一项所述的方法的单元。A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is a first node, comprising a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 1-9 or claim 16 or claim 19 .
  22. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为网络设备,包括用于执行如权利要求10-14任意一项所述的方法的单元。A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is a network device, comprising a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 10-14.
  23. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第二节点,包括用于执行如权利要求15-20任意一项所述的方法的单元。A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is a second node, comprising a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 15-20.
  24. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为第一节点,包括处理器和存储器;A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is a first node, comprising a processor and a memory;
    其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行如权利要求1-9或权利要求16或权利要求19任意一项所述的方法。Wherein, the memory is used for storing program codes, and the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-9 or claim 16 or claim 19 .
  25. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为网络设备,包括处理器和存储器;A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is network equipment, comprising a processor and a memory;
    其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行如权利要求10-14任意一项所述的方法。Wherein, the memory is used for storing program codes, and the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 10-14.
  26. 一种确定传输参数装置,其特征在于,所述确定传输参数装置为网络设备,包括处理器和存储器;A device for determining transmission parameters, characterized in that the device for determining transmission parameters is network equipment, comprising a processor and a memory;
    其中,所述存储器用于存储程序代码,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的程序代码,执行如权利要求15-20任意一项所述的方法。Wherein, the memory is used for storing program codes, and the processor is used for calling the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 15-20.
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被处理器执行时,实现如权利要求1-20任意一项所述方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, implements the method according to any one of claims 1-20.
PCT/CN2020/121327 2020-10-15 2020-10-15 Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium WO2022077402A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/121327 WO2022077402A1 (en) 2020-10-15 2020-10-15 Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/121327 WO2022077402A1 (en) 2020-10-15 2020-10-15 Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022077402A1 true WO2022077402A1 (en) 2022-04-21

Family

ID=81208726

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/121327 WO2022077402A1 (en) 2020-10-15 2020-10-15 Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022077402A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110149714A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-20 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 A kind of ascending transmission method, user equipment and the network equipment
CN110326324A (en) * 2017-02-28 2019-10-11 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communications method, terminal device and the network equipment
US20190320297A1 (en) * 2016-12-30 2019-10-17 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Service Data Transmission Method, Network Device, and Terminal Device
CN111386668A (en) * 2017-11-25 2020-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Reference signal configuration method and device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190320297A1 (en) * 2016-12-30 2019-10-17 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Service Data Transmission Method, Network Device, and Terminal Device
CN110326324A (en) * 2017-02-28 2019-10-11 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communications method, terminal device and the network equipment
CN111386668A (en) * 2017-11-25 2020-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Reference signal configuration method and device
CN110149714A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-20 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 A kind of ascending transmission method, user equipment and the network equipment

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10313073B2 (en) Transmission of reference signals
WO2020187192A1 (en) Overheat indication method and related device
WO2018141272A1 (en) Terminal, network device and communication method
CA3078839A1 (en) System and method for control signaling via csi-rs
CN110506444B (en) System and method for providing explicit feedback in a communication system with multipoint connections
KR102200645B1 (en) Resource configuration method and device
WO2020164638A1 (en) Antenna parameter adjustment method and related apparatus
CN111817798B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
US10951296B1 (en) Direction-controlled PAPR reduction
JP6927549B2 (en) Methods, User Equipment (UE) and Programs to Support Beamformed Sounding Reference Signals
WO2021217328A1 (en) Csi reporting techniques for multi-panel full duplex base stations
US11177982B2 (en) System and method for providing explicit feedback in the uplink
WO2020015660A1 (en) Method for transmitting information element, communication node, system and storage medium
CN111344989A (en) Method and apparatus for setting reference signal in wireless communication system
CN110612736A (en) Communication apparatus, base station, method, and recording medium
WO2017132793A1 (en) Method, system and apparatus
WO2022077402A1 (en) Method for determining transmission parameters, related apparatus and device, and readable storage medium
CN110581726B (en) Method and device for transmitting signal and reporting channel state information and storage medium
CN116325877A (en) Channel state information reporting method and device
WO2023230300A1 (en) Reconfigurable intelligent surface channel state information
KR20240000211A (en) Apparatus and method for measuring ue-to-ue interference in a full-duplex communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20957180

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20957180

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1